THE  LIBRARY 

OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY 
OF  CALIFORNIA 

LOS  ANGELES 


: 


THE 


HAND-BOOK  or  TAKIGRAFY. 

GATING    BRIEFLY  THE  ^^ 

N /  PRINCIPLES  OF  THE  CONTRACTED  STYLE, 
\  S&.V       ™  >^  >     .»    \ 


AND  DESIGNED  FOR  THE  USE  OF 


AMANUENSES 


VJERBATIM    REPORTERS. 

,  \ 


( 


INTRODUCTORY  CHAPTER  ON  THE  SIMPLE  STYLE. 


BY 

DAVID  PHILIP  LINDSLEY, 

Author  of  "  The  Elements^  "  The  Manual,"  "  The  NotetaJcr,"  etc. 


SECOND   EDITION. 


CHICAGO: 
D.  KIMBALL,  PUBLISHER,  83  MADISON  STREET. 

1884. 


Entered  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1882,  by 

D.  F.  LINDSLEY. 
in  the  Office  of  the  Librarian  of  Congress,  Washington,  1).  C. 


PREFACE, 

The  following  work  is  the  first  complete  treatise  on  the  new 
short-hand,  Takigrafy.     In  its  simpler  form  Takigrafy  has  been 
widely  known,  and  is  widely  used  ;  and  the  Contracted  Style, 
though  previously  but  partially  published,  is  used  in  all  parts 
of  the  country.     The  Note-Taker  was  published  hi  1873  and 
Part  I  of  the  Reporter  in  1880.    The  plates  of  both  these  works 
were  destroyed  in  the  Park  Row  fire  of  January  1882,  so  that 
t»     the  Hand-Book  is  now  the  only  work  on  the  Contracted  Style 
^     of  Takigrafy.     The  principles  of  the  entire  system  have  been 
>-     condensed  into  this  work  ;  but  as  the  Simple  Style  is  treated 
very  briefly,  the  student  is  advised  to  master  that  style  prac- 
tically by  a  study  of  either  the  Elements  or  Manual,  as  a  prep- 
aration for  the  study  of  this  work. 

«o        Commencing  with  the  Contracted  Style,  the  system  is  given 
jj 

in  detail,  and  will  be  found  a  complete  and  sufficient  guide  to 

z  reporting  practice.  Ample  illustrations  of  the  principles  are 
given,  (engraved  in  the  Takgrafic  character,)  and  the  writing 
exercises,  to  which  the  student  is  especially  referred,  furnish 

Jjj    more  complete  instruction  for  forming  the  outlines. 

No  one  can  feel  more  keenly  than  the  author,  the  inadequacy 

**  of  even  the  best  of  text-books  in  an  art  of  such  wide  and  widen- 
ing influence.  The  uses  of  short-hand  writing  are  becoming 
so  varied  that  it  is  no  longer  possible  to  treat  of  them  fully 
in  a  single  volume.  The  different  branches  of  strictly  profes- 
sional work  require  a  special  treatise.  Very  much  time 
has  been  squandered  by  young  writers  in  learning  outlines  for 
words  and  phrases  that  they  were  quite  sure  never  to  meet 
again  after  their  course  of  study  was  completed.  Perhaps 


PREFACE. 

this  cannot  be  avoided  altogether,  but  the  author  has  thought 
it  advisable  in  this  work  to  avoid  technical  and  scientific  terms, 
leaving  them  to  be  taken  up  as  an  after  course,  when  the  pupil 
has  settled  down  upon  some  special  line  of  reporting  practice. 
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS. 

Many  of  the  contractions  used  in  the  Reporting  Style  of 
Takigrafy  are  taken  from  the  Phonography  of  Isaac  Pitman, 
Esq.,  of  Bath,  England,  as  enlarged  and  improved  by  the 
experience  of  many  writers.  Takigrafy  having  added  many 
forms  of  contraction  peculiarly  its  own,  has  also  been  greatly 
enriched  by  those  who  have  used  it  professionally  during  the 
last  fifteen  years,  and  has  aimed  to  incorporate  everything  of 
excellence  that  the  combined  experience  of  both  Takigrafers 
and  Phonographers  have  furnished  during  a  period  of  more 
than  forty  years. 

Among  those  who  have  contributed  to  the  perfection  of  the 
Reporting  Style  of  Takigrafy,  are  Mr.  D.  Kimball,    Chicago, 
HI.,   who   gave    his    personal    services   to   the   art  for   many 
years,  and  who  introduced  it  extensively  in  the  Western  States ; 
Adley  H.   Cummings,    Law   Reporter,  San    Francisco,  Cal.  ; 
C.  H.  Herrick,  Galveston,  Texas ;  Arthur  M.  May,  Waukon, 
Iowa,  and  E.   B.  Goodrich,  Ypsilanti,  Mich.,  (Official  Court 
Reporter) ;     Rev.  W.  A.  Yingling,  Findlay,  Ohio  ;  Rev.  J.  H. 
Cliilds,  Wenham,  Mass. ;  and  many  others. 

The  author  cannot,  however,  agree  with  those  who  suppose 
that  the  art  has  reached  its  fullest  measure  of  perfection. 
It  is  doubtless  capable  of  still  further  advances  ;  but  these 
advances  must  be  made  by  conserving  the  excellences  already 
made  practical.  The  authors  of  systems  on  other  bases,  differ- 
ing from  the  Phonographic  and  Takigrafic,  have  contributed 
nothing,  and,  from  the  nature  of  the  case,  can  hardly  con- 
tribute anything  to  the  general  result. 


CONTENTS. 


INTRODUCTION. 

PAGE  SECT. 

The  Value  and  Use  of  Shorthand 5 

The  Peculiar  Advantages  of  Takigrafy 6 

Previous  Works  on  Takigrafy 7 

Preparation  for  the  Study  of  this  Work 9 

Length  of  Time  Required  to  Master  the  Art 11 

The  Scope  of  the  Present  Work 11 

The  Magnitude  of  the  Reporter's  Profession 12 

SIMPLE  STYLE,  CHAPTER  I. — ALPHABET.  15 

The  Consonant  Letters,— how  written 1 

The  Joining  of  the  Consonants, — General  Principles 2 

The  Vocal  Signs, — their  Uses ; 3 

General  Principles  of  Joining  Vocal  Signs 4 

Disjoined  Vocals ,  6 

The  use  of  the  Variable  Letters 6 

Position  of  Outlines «  7 

DIPHTHONGAL  SIGNS.— The  TFa-Series 8 

Compounds  of  the  El-and  .Ar-Series 9, 10 

The  tf-Circle  Series, 11 

"         "       used  Medially 12 

"         "       before  the  Compounds  of  the  El-and.  -4r-Series 13 

Long  Sign  Es                   "                        "                       "  13 

The  Terminations  ion,  ier,  ure,  &c 14 

Shortened  Forms  used  in  the  Simple  Style 15 

Reading  Lesson  in  Simple  Style, — Sermon  on  the  Mount 28 

CONTRACTED  STYLE,  CHAPTER  I. — WORD-SIGNS.     29 

Classes  of  Word-Signs 16 

Table  of  Word-Signs 80-36 

Reading  Lesson  1,— Exercise  on  the  Word-Signs 37 

Key  to  Reading  Lesson  1 38 

Writing  Exercise  1 38-39 

CHAPTER  II. — EXTENDED  USE  OF  THE  JE?-AND 

.Ar-HoOK  SIGNS.  40 

Additional  Signs  of  the  J^-hook  Series 17 

Large  Initial  Hooks  on  the  Straight  Stems 18 

"          "      Hook  on  Ve  and  Ef 19 

Zhe  and  ZMr  used  for  Ja  and  Jer 20 


CONTENTS. 

Miscellaneous  Compounds,  Emp,  El-r,  Hel,  Arch,  Arj 21 

Use  of  the  Compound  Signs,  General  Principles 22 

'1  he  Tick  vised  for  Ha,  Who,  and  Final  y 23 

Reading  Lesson  2, — 45 

Writing  Exercise  2  and  3 40-48 

CHAPTER  III. — THE  USE  OF  THE  CIRCLE  AND  THE 
DOUBLE  CIRCLE.  49 

The  Circle  before  Ha,  Wa  and  Ha 24 

Es  before  the  Compounds  of  the  El  Series,  and  Ja  and  Cha 25 

Circle  before  the  Compounds  of  the  Ar  Series 26 

The  Circle  used  f  or  Ze 27 

Vocalization  of  words  containing  the  Circle,  &c 28 

The  Circle  used  on  the  Vocal  Signs 29 

The  Double  sized  Circle 30 

The  Circle  and  Long  Sign 31 

Reading  Lesson  3, — 56 

Writing  Exercises  4  and  5 57-59 

CHAPTER  IV. — St  AND  Sir  LOOPS.         60 

The  St  Loop 32,  33 

The  Str  Loop 34 

Circles  and  Lo'  ps 35 

Reading  Lesson  4,— 63 

Writing  Exercise  6 64-65 

CHAPTER  V. — THE  USE  OF  THE  FINAL  HOOKS.    06 

The  -EVi-Hook 36,  37 

The  Sfion-Hook. 38 

Special  Use  of  the  «SAon-Hook 39 

The  Fe-Hook 40 

Reading  Lesson  5,— 70 

Writing  Exercises  7  and  8 71-72 

CHAPTER  VI. — SHORTENED  LETTERS.       73 

Half-Length  Letters 41,  42 

Shortened  Stems  having  Final  Hooks 43 

Reading  Lesson  6, — Gold 76 

Writing  Exercises  9  and  10 77-79 

CHAPTER  VII. — LENGTHENED  CURVES.   80 

Double-Length  Curves 44 

Lengthened  Up-strokes 45 

Double-Lengths,  and  other  forms  of  Contraction 46 

Treble- Length  Curves 47 

Treble-Length  Ea,  Wa,  Ha  and  Wa 48 

Reading  Lesson  7,— Execution  of  John  Brown,  &c 84 

Writing  Exercise  11 85-86 


CONTENTS.  3 

CHAPTER  VIII. — PREFIXES.  87 

Simple  Prefix  Signs 49 

Contra,  Counter,  Magna-i,  Self,  Trans,  With 50 

Extra-i-u,  Ex  and  Exter,  &c 51 

Im,  In,  Intra-e-i-o-u  and  Intraiu 52 

Other  Prefixes  and  Prefix-Syllables 53 

The  Prefix  Ad  before  Ve  and  Ja, 91 

The  Compound  Prefixes 54 

Heading  Lesson  8,— Modern  Republics 92 

Writing  Exercises  12, 13  and  14 93-96 

CHAPTER  IX. — AFFIX  SIGNS.  97 

Table  of  Affix  Signs 55 

The  use  of  the  Affixes 56 

Other  Affix  SyUables 57 

Repeated  Letters  in  Initial  Syllables 58 

Reading  Lesson  9,— National  Character, 102 

Writing  Exercise  15 103-1  "4 

CHAPTER  X. — PHRASE  SIGNS.  105 

General  Directions  for  Phrase  Writing 59-60 

Table  of  Simple  Phrase-Signs,  with  Key 106-107 

Regularly  Contracted  Phrases,  with  Key 108-109 

Phrases  Irregularly  Contracted,  with  Key 110-111 

Miscellaneous  Phrase-Signs, — with  Key 112-113 

Reading  Lesson  10,— Labor— Carlyle 114 

Writing  Exercises  16  and  17 115-117 

"        18  Motion  of  the  Heavenly  Bodies,— Dick 118 

CHAPTER  XI.— ANALOGY  AND  EUGRAPHY.       119 

The  Laws  of  Analogy 63 

Syllabication 64 

Eugraphy 65 

Requirements  of  Speed 66 

The  Nature  of  the  Angles 67 

The  Homogeneousness  of  the  Curves     '. 68 

Lineality  and  Phrasing 69 

Requirements  of  Legibility 70 

Reading  Lesson  11,— Mystery 128 

Writing  Exercises  19  and  20 129-131 

"          21  A  Universal  Alphabet 132 

CHAPTER  XII. — MISCELLANEOUS  CONTRACTIONS.     133 

Consonant  Letters  Omitted 71 

Additional  and  Duplicate  Word-Signs  134-135 

Derivative  Word-Signs— with  Key 136-137 

Words  Distinguished  by  Difference  of  Outline,— with  Key 138-141 

Special  Methods  of  Abbreviation,— Initial  Letters 74 

Transcription 75 


CONTENTS. 


Punctuation 76 

Aids 77 

Concluding  Instructions 78 

Reading  Lesson  12,— The  Launching  of  the  Ship 146 

_"  "          Our  Countries  Future 147 

~"  "          The  Love  of  Power 148 

Writing  Exercise  22,  Writing— Writ  ing  Well 149 

"  "          23  The  Armor  of  Eric 151 

"  "          24  Freedom  and  Patriotism 153 

Reading  Lesson.— Psalms,  Chap.  19 154 

"  "          Isaiah,  Chap.  64 155 

Specimens  of  Business  Letters,  with  Key 156-157 

Law  Reporting. — Testimony, — with  Key 158-159 

"  "          Lawyers  Plea 160-161 

"  "          Indian  Picture  Writing, — Hiawatha, 162 

"  "          Expression  of  Thought, — Channing 163 

"  "          Declaration  of  Independence, — with  Key 164-167 

"          Extract  from  Paradise  Lost. . .  .  168 


INTRODUCTION. 


THE  VALUE  AND  USE  OF  SHORT-HAND 

Of  the  use  of  Short-  Hand  Writing  in  making  verbatim  re- 
ports of  speeches,  conventions,  law  cases,  &c.,  little  need,  at 
this  late  day,  be  said.  Its  great  importance  for  such  purposes 
is  universally  conceded. 

Quite  recently  a  demand  for  the  art  has  sprung  up  in  busi- 
ness circles.  It  has  been  introduced  into  our  leading  business 
establishments  of  almost  all  kinds,  railroad,  telegraph,  and 
express  offices,  and  bids  fair  at  the  present  time  to  greatly 
relieve  and  assist  the  labors  of  the  pen  in  every  department  of 
business. 

But  there  is  a  still  wider  field  open  for  cultivation  in  which 
short-hand  writing  has  not,  as  generally  taught,  been  success- 
ful. Though  great  expectations  were  entertained  thirty  or 
forty  years  ago  of  the  success  of  the  old  English  Phonography, 
for  these  general  purposes,  and  for  all  the  uses  of  writing 
purely  literary  and  professional  work  is  still  mainly  done  in 
the  old  way.  Editors,  authors,  lawyers,  and  clergymen  still 
continue  to  use  the  common  writing.  The  immense  amount 
of  matter  which  finds  its  way  into  our  books,  magazines, 
newspapers,  &c.  is  still  written  in  the  common  way,  as  well  as 
correspondence  for  business  and  social  purposes,  except  as 
dictated  to  amanuenses,  which,  taken  hi  the  aggregate,  forms 
an  amount  of  written  matter  entirely  incalculable.  It  is  ques- 
tionable whether  the  millions  of  tons  of  freight  that  choke  the 
avenues  of  our  internal  trade — that  burden  our  rail-roads, 
canals  and  coast  lines — is  as  extensive  or  as  important,  as  the 
mental  products  that  need  record  and  transportation  in  o  ur 
advancing  civilization.  It  is  quite  impossible  that  a  people 
with  the  most  magnificent  opportunities,  and  the  grandest 
providential  destiny,  at  this  time,  when  moral  forces  are  all- 

5 


6  THE  HAND-BOOK 

controlling,  can  consent  to  have  the  avenues  of  thought  clogged 
up,  while  facilities  for  material  development  are  abundant  and 
ever  increasing.  That  the  art  of  short-hand  will  enter  into 
and  occupy  this  vast  field  is  certain,  and  it  will  save  at  least 
three-fourths  the  time  and  a  much  larger  percentage  of  the 
labor  of  writing. 

One  reason  of  the  neglect  of  short-hand  heretofore  is  that 
most  of  the  current  systems  are  adapted  only  to  the  reporter 
or  amanuensis.  If  the  experience  of  the  past  forty  years  has 
demonstrated  anything  in  reference  to  the  art,  it  has  shown  that 
a  style  cannot  be  adapted  to  universal  use,  and  to  reporting  and 
amanuensis  purposes  at  the  same  time.  If  short-hand  writing 
is  to  be  generally  introduced  it  can  only  be  by  teaching  a  style 
universally  practical.  It  must  be  simple  enough  to  be  easily 
acquired  and  perfectly  legible  in  its  simplest  form,  and  yet 
so  flexible  as  to  be  easily  contracted  into  a  briefer  form  for 
reporting  purposes. 

THE  PECULIAR  ADVANTAGES  OF  TAKIGRAFY. 
For  all  the  uses  mentioned  above,  Takigrafy  is  adapted.  It 
has  a  fully  written  style  suitable  for  correspondence  and  for 
recording  business  transactions,  capable  of  taking  the  place  of 
long-hand  for  all  purposes.  Built  on  this  style  as  a  foundation, 
is  the  Contracted  Style,  adapted  to  all  the  wants  of  the  pro- 
fessional short-hand  writer.  This  Contracted  Style  is  capable 
of  a  greater  or  less  degree  of  condensation.  There  is  no  as- 
signable limit  to  the  degree  of  brevity  that  may  be  secured, 
though  in  every  kind  of  writing  there  is  a  limit  to  the  degree 
of  contraction  practically  useful.  The  Simple  Style  may  also 
be  written  with  a  greater  or  less  degree  of  fullness.  It  may  be 
written  with  as  much  minuteness  and  accuracy  as  our  com- 
mon long-hand  writing,  (silent  letters  only  being  omitted, )  or 
it  may  be  written,  as  it  generally  is,  by  the  introduction  of  a 
few  of  the  most  frequently  recurring  word-signs,  and  an 
omission  of  obscure  and  unaccented  vowels,  thus  rendering 
even  the  Simple  Style  capable  of  being  written  with  great 
rapidity.  And  yet  it  will  be  seen  that  these  two  styles,  with 
their  variations,  are  so  closely  related  as  to  form  one  and  the 
same  system.  In  its  adaptations  then,  to  all  of  the  uses  of 


OF  TAKIGRAFT. 


•writing,  Takigrafy  stands  alone ;  and  yet,  each  style  is  as 
perfectly  adapted  to  the  use  for  which  it  is  intended  as  it 
could  possibly  be,  if  there  were,  as  in  Phonography,  but  one 

style. 

PREVIOUS  WORKS  ON  TAKIQRAFY. 

The  Simple  Style  was  first  published  in  The  Compendium 
of  Tachygraphy  in  1864,  and  more  fully  elaborated  in  the  Ele- 
ments, published  in  1869  ;  but  the  Contracted  Style  was  not 
published  until  1873  and  then  only  partially  as  given  in  the 
Note-Taker. 

The  Note-Taker  was  not  designed  to  serve  professional 
reporters  ;  but,  primarily,  students  in  our  colleges  and  semi- 
naries who  might  wish  a  briefer  style  than  that  taught 
in  the  Elements.  The  Note-Taker,  supplemented  by  con- 
tractions published  from  time  to  time  in  the  Rapid  Writer  and 
Takigrafer,  was  used  by  young  men  and  young  ladies  am- 
bitious to  take  positions  as  amanuenses,  or  verbatim  reporters  ; 
but  the  Reporting  Style  of  Takigrafy  was  taught  only  by  means 
of  private  instruction  and  manuscripts,  and  hundreds  of  pupils 
acquired  it  in  this  way.  Meantime  it  was  held,  as  an  article 
of  faith,  by  certain  publishers  and  their  friends  that  Takigrafy 
had  no  reporting  style.  The  fact  that  those  using  the  art 
professionally  were  found  in  nearly  all  our  cities  throughout 
the  Northern,  Middle,  and  Western  states,  and  on  the  Pacific 
coast,  was  ignored  by  these  men,  who  saw  in  the  Simple  Style 
of  Takigrafy  a  formidable  rival.  They  sought  to  hinder  the 
progress  of  one  of  the  most  beneficent  inventions  of  the  age, 
by  pretending  that  it  was  deficient  in  its  adaptation  to  the 
wants  of  professional  reporters. 

The  author  of  Takigrafy  was  not  in  haste  to  repel  this  injus- 
tice. While  not  indifferent  to  the  wants  of  the  few  who 
wished  to  become  professional  writers,  he  regarded  it  as  much 
more  important  that  the  *Simple  Style  should  be  widely  intro- 
duced and  practiced,  and  if,  by  the  eclipse  of  the  art  for  a  time 
in  its  adaptation  to  reporting,  lie  could  make  its  use  for  liter- 
ary and  business  purposes  more  apparent,  he  was  willing  to 

*Some  may  wish  to  know  the  measure  of  success  which  the  author  has 
met  with  in  the  introduction  of  the  Simple  Style  of  Takigrafy.  It  is  impos- 
sible to  give  full  statistics  on  the  subject ;  but  an  approximate  estimate  may 


8  THE  HAND-BOOK 

wait  for  a  vindication  of  the  briefer  style,  — a  vindication 
easily  made  when  the  proper  time  for  it  arrived.  There  were, 
it  is  true,  many  who  thought  that  the  publication  of  the  art 
in  its  briefest  form  was  essential  to  its  introduction  for  general 
uses.  Perhaps  they  were  right  in  this,  as  hundreds,  possibly 
thousands  of  persons,  turned  away  from  Takigraf y  who  were 
attracted  by  its  simplicity,  bnt  who  were  led  to  believe  that,  if 
they  found  the  art  adapted  to  their  use  in  its  simple  form, 

be  made,  based  on  the  number  of  text  books  sold.  So  far  as  we  may  judge 
from  this,  ten  persons  have  learned  the  Simple  Style  of  Takigrafy  for  every 
one  that  has  learned  the  Contracted.  This  proportion  in  favor  of  the  Simple 
Style  is  much  less  than  it  should  be ;  for  the  Simple  Style  is  adapted  to 
the  wants  of  at  least  a  hundred  times  as  many  as  need  a  Reporting  Style ; 
and  we  have  no  doubt  that,  when  its  capabilities  for  usefulness  are  clearly 
understood,  literary  and  business  men  generally  will  avail  themselves  of 
its  use.  There  has  been  a  protracted  effort  to  prejudice  the  public  mind 
on  this  subject,  by  creating  an  impression  that  a  style  was  of  no  value  what- 
ever that  could  be  written  only  at  the  rate  of  a  hundred  words  a  minute. 
The  insincerity  of  this  pretense  will  be  seen  from  the  following  considerations. 

1st.  The  Corresponding  Style  of  Phonography,  which  some  publishers  even 
yet  attempt  to  make  prominent,  has  never  reached  that  rate  of  speed,  and 
seldom  reaches  a  speed  of  more  than  fifty  words  a  minute. 

2nd.  A  speed  of  one  hundred  words  a  minute,  or  even  a  speed  of  eighty  or 
ninety  words  is  a  very  great  advance  in  labor-saving  over  the  speed  of 
twenty  to  thirty  words,  which  may  be  considered  the  maximum  of  ordinary 
business  writing. 

3rd.  If  to  treble  the  rate  of  speed  in  writing  is  of  small  account,  why  should 
we  boast  of  our  ability  to  treble  our  rate  of  speed  in  travelling.  The  old 
stage  coaches  ran  on  good  roads  at  the  rate  of  ten  miles  an  hour,  while  our 
modern  railroads  scarcely  reach  thirty  miles  an  hour  in  their  ordinary  traffic. 
To  do  three  hours  work  in  one  will  not  be  regarded  by  sensible  men  as  an 
unimportant  advantage. 

4th.  But  even  this  does  not  measure  the  full  advantage  of  the  Simple 
Style  of  Takigrafy,  for  while  it  saves  two-thirds  of  the  time  it  saves  a  far 
greater  proportion  of  the  labor  of  writing.  This  is  also  comparable  to  the 
advantage  gained  by  the  rail-car  over  the  stage-coach  for  we  not  only 
travel  with  more  rapidity  but  with  more  ease  and  comfort. 

5th.  But  the  most  important  consideration  is  the  fact  that,  for  all  ordi- 
nary purposes,  the  Simple  Style  of  Takigraphy  is  as  brief  as  is  compatible 
with  legibility  and  simplicity. 

No  other  system  has  ever  approximated  this  rate  of  speed  in  any  prac- 
tical form.  The  same  classes  of  pupils  that  in  Takigrafy  write  from  sixty 
to  one-hundred  words  in  a  minute,  after  three  or  four  months  of  practice, 
write  in  Phonography  only  half  as  fast  or  from  thirty  to  fifty  words  ; 
hence,  the  insincerity  of  objectors  is  apparent,  and  the  enthusiasm  of  the 
multitudes  who  regard  this  style  as  the  great  literary,  business,  and  social 


OF  TAKIGRAFY. 


they  might,  at  some  future  time,  be  embarrassed  by  not  being 
able  to  go  on  to  the  full  perfection  of  a  finished  and  elaborate 
reporting  style.     This  fear  was  entirely  without  foundation 
as,  Takigrafy  was  from  the  very  first,  able  to  appropriate  all 
the  forms    of    contraction   used   by  Phonographers,   besides 
having  resources   of  its    own,  peculiar  and  important. 
THE  PREPARATION  FOR  THE  STUDY  OF  THIS  WORK. 
A  thorough  mastery  of  the  Simple  Style  of  Takigrafy  as 
taught  in  the  Manual  and  Elements,  is  the  best  preparation 

desideratum  of  the  times,  is  fully  justified.  This  style,  and  this  alone,  is 
capable  of  transforming  the  writing  of  our  entire  people.  There  is  no 
form  of  business  to  which  it  is  not  applicable,  there  are  no  social  or  li terary 
purposes  for  which  it  cannot  be  used ;  and  if  I  am  told  that  there  is  still  one 
impediment  in  the  path  of  its  progress,  namely,  that  people  generally  do 
not  understand  it,  and  therefore  cannot  read  it,  I  reply  that  this  impediment 
can  be  removed  with  perfect  ease,  and  within  the  space  of  less  than  ten 
years,  by  united  effort  in  that  direction.  Taught  in  our  schools  of  every 
grade  from  the  infant  class  up,  it  can  be  reduced  to  practice  in  one-half  of 
the  time  required  to  master  the  common  long  hand.  More  than  this,  it  can 
be  taught  without  impeding,  in  the  slightest  degree,  any  other  branch  of 
study.  It  can  be  taught  in  such  a  way  as  to  save,  rather  than  consume  time, 
even  in  the  process  of  imparting  a  knowledge  of  its  rudiments.  Pupils 
must  be  taught  the  phonology  of  the  language.  They  can  be  taught  it  by 
this  means  in  a  small  fraction  of  the  time  required  by  the  usual  method, 
and  by  the  time  this  important  branch  of  an  English  education  is  under- 
stood, the  pupil  is  already  a  ready  writer  of  Takigrafy,  with  command  of 
this  wonderful  art. 

It  would  be  easy,  of  course,  to  discover  other  difficulties.  What  line  of 
human  progress  have  ever  been  without  them  ?  Never  was  a  beneficent 
invention  more  free  from  real  impediments  in  its  introduction,  while,  per- 
haps, none  have  been  more  thoroughly  barricaded  by  fancied  ones. 

We  have  thought  it  necessary  to  make  these  remarks  on  the  Simple  Style 
lest  some  should  infer  from  our  silence  that  we  had  abandoned  the  labor  of 
twenty  years  in  despair,  and  sank  down  to  the  low  level  of  Stenography, 
Where  the  Phonographic  writers  arrived  long  ago.  Having  lost  the  inspira- 
tion of  its  first  introduction.  Phonography  aims  only  at  an  improved  form 
of  Stenography ;  and  its  professors,  wrapping  themselves  up  in  professional 
dignity,  and  perched  upon  a  high  and  almost  inaccessible  crag,  beckon 
students  upward  to  their  own  isolated  position,  well  knowing  that  only 
one  in  a  hundred  of  the  aspirants  will  succeed. 

The  author  determined  long  ago  to  place  the  art  of  short-hand  writing  on 
an  honest  basis,  and  it  is  with  no  little  satisfaction  that  he  has  found  among 
his  friends  staunch  defenders  of  every  humane  and  moral  movement. 
That  the  good  work  will  go  forward  to  a  speedy  and  glorious  success  he  has 
not  a  particle  of  doubt. 


10  THE  HAND-BOOK 

for  a  study  of  this  work.  It  has  been  objected  by  some  that 
it  is  a  disadvantage  for  those  who  desire  to  become  reporters, 
to  use  the  longer  forms  of  the  Simple  Style  since  they  must 
be  unlearned  as  the  student  proceeds  in  the  study  of  the  art. 

There  is  doubtless  some  truth  in  this  suggestion,  so  far  at 
least  as  it  applies  to  the  words  of  most  frequent  occurrence  ; 
but  the  student  should  not  overlook  the  very  important  fact 
that  the  principles  of  contraction  apply  at  most  to  only  a  few 
thousand  words,  while  a  far  greater  number  of  words  are  of 
very  infrequent  occurrence,  and  must  be  written  in  full 
if  they  are  to  be  made  entirely  legible.  Now,  if  the  student 
has  never  learned  the  Simple  style,  or  has  passed  over  it 
hastily,  without  reducing  it  to  practice,  these  uncommon 
words,  technical  terms,  and  proper  names  of  persons  and 
places,  which  have  no  assignable  limit  in  number,  are  con- 
tinual sources  of  embarrassment.  Words  of  frequent  occur- 
rence, for  which  the  student  has  contracted  forms,  may  be 
mastered  in  time,  anu  successfully  used  ;  but  unusual,  techni- 
cal and  proper  names,  can  never  be  fully  mastered,  being 
too  numerous  for  special  study  and  drill.  On  the  other  hand, 
the  student  who  has  reduced  the  Simple  Style  of  Takigrafy 
thoroughly  to  practice,  can  write  any  word  in  the  language 
with  ease  and  fluency.  He  is  already  master  of  the  class  of 
words  of  which  we  have  spoken,  and  when  he  has  learned  the 
principles  of  the  Contracted  style,  in  their  application  to  the 
three  or  four  thousand  words  of  frequent  occurrence,  he  be- 
comes speedily  a  successful  writer.  This  is  not  mere  theory  ; 
experience  in  teaching  hundreds  of  pupils  confirms  it.  We 
have  never  known  a  single  instance  in  our  experience  in 
teaching,  nor  has  an  instance  been  brought  to  our  notice,  in 
which  a  student  has  found  any  marked  advantage  in  the 
neglect  of  the  Simple  Style  ;  while  multitudes  of  persons  have 
expressed  their  regret  for  having  neglected  it,  for  the  reasons 
stated  above.  As  a  universal  rule  those  students  succeed 
soonest,  and  become  the  best  writers,  who  master  the  Simple 
Style  most  perfectly  before  commencing  the  Contracted. 
If  any  gentlemen  are  pleased  to  amuse  themselves,  and 
those  over  whom  they  have  influence,  by  decrying  this 
method  of  study,  their  objections  are  certainly  based  on  no 


OF  TAKIGRAFY.  11 

sufficient  grounds.  We  have  said  that,  to  a  limited  extent,  the 
unlearning  of  longer  forms  for  words  of  frequent  occurrence, 
may  be  a  disadvantage  ;  but  this  difficulty  may  be  easily  met 
by  introducing  the  pupil  at  an  early  stage  of  his  progress  to 
the  word  signs,  which  he  can  use,  in  connection  with  the 
Simple  Style,  until  he  is  thoroughly  grounded  in  the  principles 
of  the  art,  and  can  write  from  seventy  to  one  hundred  words 
a  minute.  He  will  then  be  prepared  to  take  up  the  study  of 
the  second  part  of  this  work,  and  will  pass  through  it  with 
rapidity  and  success. 

THE  LENGTH  OF  TIME  REQUIRED  TO  MASTER  THE  ART. 
This  will  differ  very  much  with  different  persons,  and  will 
depend  upon  the  method  of  study  and  attending  circum- 
stances. Those  able  to  give  it  their  full  attention  under  the 
guide  of  a  competent  teacher,  can  master  the  Simple  Style  in 
six  or  seven  weeks,  and  the  Contracted  Style  in  three  months. 
This  is  the  length  of  time  given  to  the  study  in  the  Plainfield 
School  of  Takigrafy,  and  is  believed  to  be  sufficient  in  most 
cases. 

THE  SCOPE  OF  THE  PRESENT  WORK. 

The  author  presents  the  work  to  his  friends  and  the  public 
with  great  pleasure.  Though  far  enough  from  being  com- 
plete, and  capable  of  still  further  advances  toward  perfection, 
still  it  is,  in  all  respects,  adapted  to  the  wants  of  professional 
writers.  In  practice  all  professions  tower  far  above  the  text 
books  which  teach  their  elementary  principles.  No  reporter 
is  expected  to  be  limited  to  any  one  exposition  of  principles,  no 
matter  how  excellent,  any  more  than  a  professional  man  is 
expected  to  be  limited  to  the  tenets  of  one  school ;  but  as  pro- 
fessional men  prefer  to  associate  in  societies,  and  maintain 
certain  principles  which  are  believed  to  be  superior,  so  short- 
hand writers  prefer  to  associate  for  mutual  advantage.  And 
they  have  as  wide  a  field  as  writers  of  Takigrafy  as  they  can 
have  as  writers  of  any  other  system.  They  are  near  enough  to 
the  Phonographic  standards  to  appropriate  anything  that  they 
may  find  of  excellence  in  them  with  the  same  facility  that 
they  could  if  disciples  of  any  one  of  the  numerous  and  con- 
flicting systems  known  under  this  common  name. 


12  THE  HAND-BOOK 

THE  KAGNITUDE  OF  THE  REPORTER'S  PROFESSION. 

We  have  said  that  the  exigencies  of  the  reporter's  profession 
carry  him  far  beyond  the  text  books.  This  should  not  be  won- 
dered at,  for  this  practice  partakes  of  the  magnitude  of  all 
other  professions  combined.  In  Law  reporting  the  scribe  has 
all  the  variety  of  practice  that  comes  with  the  almost  infinite 
variety  of  the  subjects  discussed  and  treated ;  and  yet  the 
Medical  or  Scientific  reporter  will  come  upon  still  other  classes 
of  words  and  phrases,  and  every  branch  of  science  has  its  own 
technical  terms,  and  its  own  peculiar  phraseology.  The  ever 
widening  spheres  of  business  activity  present  many  pecu- 
liarities, and  each  business  calls  for  some  culture  in  the  art 
peculiarly  its  own,  as  for  instance,  the  Railroad,  Express  and 
Insurance  businesses.  It  was  impossible  in  this  work  to  enter 
into  these  specialties  without  making  it  too  heavy  for  the  use 
intended ;  though  some  Exercises  adapted  to  professional 
work  are  appended  by  way  of  illustration.  The  author  designs, 
however,  to  prepare  another  work,  or,  possibly,  more  than 
one,  in  which  the  principles  of  Takigrafy  will  be  applied  more 
specifically  to  special  branches  of  the  reporter's  work.  In- 
struction in  these  special  branches  will  also  be  found  in  the 
Short-hand  Writer,  which  aims  to  be  the  exponent  of  the  needs 
of  professional  writers. 

No  complete  work  in  any  branch  of  reporting  has  yet  ap- 
peared in  any  system.  Some  have  treated  partially  of  law  re- 
reporting,  yet  this  branch,  the  best  known  of  any,  is  still  very 
poorly  developed,  even  in  the  systems  which  boast  of  their 
"standard"  qualities  and  their  " completeness.  What  is 
done  well  in  any  system  which  is  constructed  on  the  basis 
common  to  Phonography  and  Takigrafy,  is  an  aid  to  all ;  and 
Takigrafers,  while  doing  their  part,  will  hail  with  joy  every 
real  advancement  made  in  the  art. 


DEFINITIONS,  AND  DIRECTIONS  FOR  STUDY. 


-TACHYGRAPHY  (now  written  as  pronounced,  Ta-kig-ra-fy .) 
— Greek  tachns,  rapid  ;  and  graphe,  writing, — rapid  writing. 

PHONOGRAPHY. — Greek  phone,  sound,  or  voice,  and  graphe 
writing ; — the  writing  of  the  sounds  of  the  human  voice. 
Any  kind  of  character  that  assumes  to  express  the  elements  of 
spoken  language.  In  a  more  restricted  sense  the  system  of 
short-hand  writing  invented  by  Mr  Isaac  Pitman  of  England, 
and  the  systems  derived  from  it. 

PHONETIC,  or  PHONIC. — Greek  phone,  voice, — pertaining  to 
the  expression  of  the  sounds  of  the  voice  in  language.  A  pho- 
netic system  of  writing  is  one  which  expresses  the  sounds  of 
speech,  as  nearly  all  languages  assume  to  do. 

CALLIGRAPHY  (kal-lig-ra-fy). — Greek  kalligraphia,  fine  or 
beautiful  writing. 

EUGRAPHY. — Greek  eugraphe,  correct  writing. 

CONSONANTALS  AND  VOCALS. — The  short-hand  letters  which 
represent  the  consonant  sounds  are  called  consonantals.  Those 
representing  vowels,  are  called  vocals,  or  vocal  signs. 

OUTLINE — WORD-FORM. — The  form  a  word  assumes  when 
written  with  the  short-hand  characters. 

MANNER  OF  HOLDING  THE  PEN. 

Hold  the  pen  between  the  first  and  second  fingers  and  thumb, 
the  penholder  pointing  well  to  the  right.  The  nibs  of  the  pen 
should  press  evenly  on  the  paper,  so  that  the  letters  can  be 
made  smoothly.  The  pen  can  be  rolled  slightly  so  as  to  adjust 
it  to  the  varying  directions  of  the  letters. 

A  good  steel  pen  is  generally  to  be  preferred.  Never  use  a 
pencil  for  practice. 

13 


14  THE  HAND-BOOK 

ON  PREPARING  THE  WRITING  EXERCISES. 

The  attention  of  the  student  is  called  especially  to  the  wri- 
ting exercises.  They  should  be  written,  and  corrected  by  a 
teacher,  then  rewritten  and  carefully  studied,  until  the  ap- 
plication of  the  principles,  in  all  their  details,  is  thoroughly 
understood.  If  this  is  done,  the  progress  of  the  student  will 
be  satisfactory  and  rapid.  Should,  however,  any  be  situated 
in  such  a  way  that  the  services  of  .a  teacher  cannot  be  ob- 
tained, the  directions  for  writing  the  exercises  will  be"  found  so 
minute  that  a  student,  with  ordinary  carefulness  and  dili- 
gence, will  be  able  to  learn  to  write  them  correctly. 

In  preparing  the  writing  exercises  for  correction,  the  student 
should  leave  the  space  of  one  line  blank  under  each  line  of 
writing;  and,  when  the  exercise  is  corrected  by  the  teacher, 
it  should  be  carefully  rewritten,  so  that  correct  word -forms  may 
be  secured.  If  the  work  is  studied  without  a  teacher,  the  same 
course  may  be  pursued.  After  preparing  the  exercise  carefully, 
lay  it  aside  for  a  day  or  more,  that  it  may  be  taken  up  afresh  ; 
then  study  each  form  carefully,  to  see  that  it  conforms  to  the 
principles  of  the  system,  correcting  every  faulty  outline; 
and  finally,  rewrite  the  whole  exercise  several  times. 

After  the  exercise  has  been  thus  prepared,  whether  with  or 
without  a  teacher,  it  should  be  written  from  dictation  until 
it  can  be  written  with  a  fair  degree  of  readiness;  say  at  the 
rate  of  75  to  100  words  a  minute. 

DRILLING  ON  THE  TABLES. 

Study  the  Tables  of  word  and  phrase-signs  carefully,  and 
copy  them  accurately.  Drill  on  each  word  and  phrase  sep- 
arately, as  in  learning  the  alphabet.  After  a  certain  portion 
of  the  table  has  been  prepared  in  this  way,  it  should  be  written 
from  dictation  several  times,  and  then  another  portion  pre- 
pared and  written  from  dictation,  in  the  same  manner.  The 
student  should  review  from  the  first  frequently,  so  that  when 
the  work  is  completed,  the  signs  can  be  used  with  the  most 
perfect  freedom. 

The  success  of  the  pupil  depends  almost  entirely  upon  his 
following  a  correct  method  of  study.  The  hints  given  above 
are  not  sufficient  to  meet  all  cases  and  kinds  of  practice,  but 
if  faithfully  followed  will  certainly  yield  excellent  results. 


r 

THE  HAND-BOOK  OF  TAKIGRAFY. 

CHAPTER  I. — SIMPLE  STYLE. 

ALPHABET    OF    TAKIGRAFY. 

SEC.  1.    CONSONANT  LETTERS. 

Written  Downward. 

Be    Pe    Ga  Ka    Ve    Ef       Zhe    Ish     The    Ith    Tha    tha 
Written  from  Left  to  Right. 

De        Te  Ze        Es  En      Ing  Ja         Cha 

Written  Upward.  Variable. 

Ra         Wa       Wha  Ha        Ya         '  Em      El      Ar 

These  letters  are  perpendicular,  horizontal,  or  inclined  to  the  left  at  an 
angle  of  45  degrees.  The  up-strokes  are  inclined  to  the  right  at  an  angle  of 
about  GO  degrees  from  the  perpendicular.  The  downward  ar  is  written  at 
an  angle  of  about  27  degrees.  The  letters  The  and  Ith,  are  reversed  into 
Tha  tha. 

The  curves  are  quarter  circles,  and  unite  with  each  other  and  the 
straight  signs  into  definite  geometrical  forms,  making  angles  right,  acute, 
and  obtuse,  or  joining  without  angles.  This  will  be  seen  in  the  following 
Illustrations  and  exercises. 

Q 


15 


16 


THE  HAND-BOOK 


SEC.  2.    THE  JOINING  OF  THE  CONSONANTS. 
After  mastering  these  letters  thoroughly,   by  drilling  on 
them  as  taught  in  the  Manual  and  Elements,  they  may  be 
joined  as  shown  in  the  following  illustrations. 

GENERAL  PRINCIPLES  OF  JOINING. 

1.  —  Acute  angles  are  better  than  obtuse;  but  joinings  with- 
out angles,  are  better  still.  2.  —  Facing  curves  are  better  than 
opposing  curves. 

Remark  1.  —  Where  there  is  a  choice  of  outline,  the  rapidity  and  beauty  of 
the  writing  will  depend  very  much  upon  the  observance  of  these  principles. 

Rem.  2.  —  These  illustrations  form  an  excellent  series  of  drills,  and  the 
student  should  drill  on  them,  taking  one  at  a  tune,  until  they  can  be 
written  with  facility  and  accurateness. 

Right  Angles. 


Acute  Angles. 

~7     L      Z_ 


A 


Facing  Curves  forming  Angles. 


Opposing  Curves  forming  Angles. 


Straight  Lines  Joined  without  Angle. 


\     \ 


,f 


OF  TAKIGRAFY.  17 


Straight  and  Curved  Lines  Joined  without  Angle. 


Rem.  3.—  The  letters  Be-El,  Ma-Be,  and  some  others  given  above,  would 
fornr  angles  if  made  with  perfect  accuracy,  but  it  is  better  in  writing 
that  this  stiffness  should  be  avoided  and  the  letters  joined  without  angle. 

Facing  Curves  Joined  without  Angle. 

-}        O         O 
a        o        C 

Opposing  Curves  Joined  without  Angle. 


Rem.  4. — The  student  should  drill  on  the  above  joining  until  each  outline 
can  be  struck  with  one  sweep  of  the  pen,  hi  a  rapid  and  graceful  manner. 

SEC.  3.    VOCAL  SIGNS. 
Heavy  and  Long. 

Semi-circles.  Dots.  Dashes.  Diamond  Points. 

ncu  •/         -NIX  f     si 

E         A      Ah  A»          Oo    O      Au  Oi 

Light  and  Short. 

ri  u  —     -^\        /  v 

i  a  e  oo       u        o  I 

THE  USE  OF  THE  VOCAL  SIGNS. 

All  of  the  vocal  signs  may  be  joined  in  writing  except  the 
dots.  They  may,  however,  where  it  is  more  convenient,  be 
used  disjoined.  Their  use  will  be  understood  from  the  follow- 
ing : 


18  THE  HAND-BOOK 

SEC.  4.    GENERAL  PRINCIPLES  OF  JOINING. 

1. — All  vocals  if  joined,  must  make  a  distinct  angle  with  the 
following  consonant.  On  the  end  of  a  consonant  the  semi-cir- 
cles except  A-long,  form  hooks,  as  in  the  examples  above. 

2. — The  full  form  of  the  long  vowel  is  preferred  to  the  hook 
where  both  are  equally  convenient  ;  but  for  the  short  vowel 
the  hook  is  preferred  to  the  full  form. 

3. — Dash  vocals  must  make  an  angle  with  both  a  preceding 
and  a  folllfwing  letter. 

4. — Either  side  of  the  diamond  points  may  be  curved  when- 
more  convenient  in  joining. 

Vocals  Joined. 

Beat       bit      caught     cot      coat      cut      coin       gout 
Bar      barrel    deep       dip    meet        mid       gate        gat 

His          has        fight        fit          suit        rude          rudder 

SEC.  5.    DISJOINED  VOCALS. 

The  dots  are  always  disjoined,  and  other  vocals  may  be 
disjoined  for  convenience  at  any  time. 

1. — If  the  disjoined  vocal  is  to  be  read  before  a  perpendicular 
or  inclined  stroke,  it  is  writen  on  the  left  of  it.  If  read  after. 
3  right.  If  read  before  a  horizontal  stroke,  it  is  written 
it.  If  read  after,  it  is  written  beloAv. 
2. — The  heavy  dot  belongs  with  the  preceding  consonant 
and  the  light  dot  with  the  following.  They  are  placed  near 
the  middle  of  the  letter,  and  are  written  near  the  end  of  the 
consonant  which  follows  them,  except  in  words  ending  in  a 
disjoined  vocal,  where  it  must  be  placed  near  the  end  of 
the  preceding  consonant. 


OF  TAKIGRAFY. 


Vocals  Disjoined. 


Fair       ferry 


Fade       favor     father      feather      southern 


lover 


Rem.  1.— The  variations  of  the  0-long  and  w-short,  are  for  convenience  in 
joining,  and  the  form  is  chosen  that  makes  the  sharpest  angle. 

Rem.  2. — The  semi-circles  are  joined  by  a  connecting  stroke  in  a  few  cases 
but  this  can  be  avoided  by  disjoining  the  vocals. 

Rem.  3. — Obscure  vowels  are  not  written,  and  unaccented  vowels  may  be 
frequently  omitted,  but  long  and  accented  vowels  should  be  written  in  the 
simple  style  in  most  cases. 

Rem.  4. — The  omission  of  silent  letters,  and  the  use  of  letters  adapted  to 
the  sounds  employed,  in  place  of  the  old  spelling,  is  understood  to  lay  at  the 
foundation  of  the  System.  This  feature  is  amply  explained  and  illustrated 
in  the  works  devoted  to  the  Simple  Style,  to  which  the  student  is  referred. 

These  principles  will  be  better  understood  by  consulting  the  following 


1. — Deed,  did,  weak,  wicked,  ticket.  2. — Detect,  auditory, 
essential,  emotion,  token.  3. — People,  pauper,  copper,  form- 
ation, location  decision.  4. — Side,  niece,  tune,  cube,  pipe, 
navigate.  5. — Public,  arrogate,  animal,  balcony,  tendency. 
6. — Heresy  hair,  wear,  emergency,  firmament. 


20 


THE  HAND-BOOK 


Note. — In  common  practice  the  disjoined  vocals  in  the  words 
wicked,  ticket,  essential,  decision,  public,  tendency,  and  heresy, 
given  above,  are  omitted. 

SEC.  6.    THE  USE  OF  THE  VARIABLE  LETTERS. 

The  general  principles  of  joinings  given  in  sections  2  and 
4,  determine  the  use  of  the  letters  which  admit  of  variation. 
They  must  be  so  used  as  to  make  acute  rather  than  obtuse 
angles  in  case  of  straight  signs,  and  curves  that  are  homoge- 
neous. These  principles  apply  both  to  the  joining  of  the  large 
letters  with  each  other,  and  the  joining  of  the  small  letters 
with  the  large. 

The  application  of  these  principles  will  be  understood  from 
the  following 

Examples. 


SEC.  7.    POSITION  OF  OUTLINES. 

1. — The  outline  of  a  word  is  its  form  as  it  stands  in  the  writ- 
ten page.  This  outline  has  a  relation  to  the  line  of  writing. 
The  first  perpendicular  or  inclined  letter  in  it,  if  it  has  such  a 
letter  rests  on  the  line  of  writing.  All  letters  which  pre- 
ceed  or  follow  this,  follow  their  own  natural  direction  with- 
out reference  to  the  line. 

2. — If  the  outline  contains\pnly  horizontal  strokes,  it  rests 
upon  the  outline.  ^^^ 

Hem.  1.— Npte  that  the  consonant  stroke  rests^a  the  Hne,  the  vocal  sign  is 
not  regarded,  but  foljows  its  own  proper  direction  below,  on  the  line,  or 
above,  as  the  case  may  be. 

Rem.  2. — If  the  word  contains  two  or  more  consonant  strokes,  the  outline 
rests  upon  the  first  perpendicular  or  inclined  stroke,  even  if  that  chances  to 


OF  TAKIGRAFY- 


21 


be  the  last  stroke  in  the  word,  as  in  the  word  centennial,  in  the  examples 
below. 

Rem.  3. — Upstrokes  are  inclined  letters  and  determin  the  position  of  the 
outline  the  same  as  the  descenders. 

Rem.  4.— It  is  not  necessary  that  the  paper  be  ruled.  The  proper  place 
for  the  line  will  be  known  though  no  line  appear  on  the  paper.  See  Manual, 
page  38. 

Illustrations. 


'V.J 


DIPHTHONGAL  SIGNS. 

All  the  words  in  the  language  can  be  written  with  the  use 
of  the  signs  already  explained  ;  but  greater  convenience  and 
beauty  of  outline  is  secured  by  the  use  of  the  diphthongal  signs 
which  represent  the  union  of  such  letters  as  pr  in  pray,  pi  in 
play,  sp  in  spy,  ps  in  hops,  &c. 

Rem. — It  would  be  theoretically  possible  to  indicate  every  union  of  conso- 
nants without  an  intervening  vowel  by  a  compound  sign ;  but  this  is  not 
always  convenient.  The  compound  signs  used  in  t  he  simple  style  are  diph- 
thongal in  character,  and  of  frequent  occurrence. 

SEC.  8.    THE  Wa  SERIES.     Qu,  Dw,  Tw,  Gu  AND  Thw. 

Of  these  Qu,  Div  and  Tw,  are  the  most  important  and  are 
provided  with  brief  signs  ;  but  they  may  be  written  with  the 
alphabetic  signs,  which  are  also  given  below  : 

The  full  forms  are  generally  employed  in  the  simple  style, 
the  briefer  forms  given  under  them  in  the  contracted  style. 

Rem.— The  full  forms  are  named  Ka-Wa,  JDe-Wa,  &c.,  from  the  Alpha- 
betic signs  of  which  they  are  composed.  The  briefer  signs  are  named  @wa, 
Dwa  and  Twa. 

P.  _^^ 

Qua  Dwa  Twa  G  a-Wa         Tha-Wa 


22 


THE  HAND-BOOK 


EXAMPLES  OP  THE  FULL  FORMS. 


Quick 


language 


dwell 


twit 


thwart 


SEC.  9.  COMPOUNDS  OF  THE  El  AND  Ar  SERIES. 
These  signs  form  two  series  —  an  initial  and  a  final  series. 
Some  of  these  signs  are  used  both  initially  and  finally,  and 
are  named  Pla,pra,  &c.,  when  initial,  Pel,  per,  &c.,  when  final. 
Those  that  belong  to  both  the  initial  and  final  series  are  the 
following  : 


Bra 
Ber 

f          1 

bla        pra 
bel         per 

r 

pla 
pel 

<\ 

gra 
ger 

^        "X 

gla      kra 
gel      ker 

kla 

kel 

c— 

c— 

9 

J> 

? 

^ 

Dra 

tra 

fra 

fla 

shra 

thra 

Der 

ter 

fer 

fel 

sher 

ther 

Used 

Initially. 

v~ 

V 

V" 

tr- 

-csw~ 

V 

Broom 

bloom 

prim 

plum 

grim 

glum 

Flame          flute        shred  thread        throng      thrill 

Used  Finally. 


Pebble 


pepper        beggar      buckle        fitful        pressure 

SEC.  10.    ADDITIONAL  SIGNS. 
The  following  signs  also  belong  to  the  final  series. 


Del 


tel       vel      ver 


ther 


nel 


Ingr 


OF  TAKIGRAFY.  23 


Examples. 


Peddle       bottle    oval       over       other     owner    kennel 

GENERAL  PRINCIPLE. 

The  signs  used  initially  are  employed  in  all  cases,  those 
used  finally  only  where  they  are  more  convenient. 

Rem.—  The  appropriate  use  of  these  signs  is  important  to  the  formation  of 
a  good  style.  The  signs  may  be  said  to  be  convenient  when  they  form  good 
angles,  and  admit  the  use  of  the  vocal  signs  where  they  are  needed. 

Examples. 


Able         table         noble       double       rabble         rebel 

^       - 


Eagle         ogle  bugle  tackle  fickle         rascal 

The  compound  signs  are  used  in  the  following  words  : 

NOTE.  —  Words  having,  only  initial  compounds  are  not  given  here,  since 
they  all  use  the  compound  signs. 

Opal,  upper,  cooper,  copal,  suffer,  sober,  bubble,  pebble, 
sample,  simple,  temple,  trample,  tremble,  member,  mumble, 
number,  limber,  amber,  timber,  eager,  ogre,  meagre,  meeker, 
local,  voycal,  focal,  ducal,  buckle,  bugle,  bigger,  beaker. 

Model,  medal,  muddle,  metal,  peddle,  puddle,  bottle,  evil, 
awful,  oval^.  over,  sever,  mover,  rover,  rougher,  tougher, 
measure,  treasure,  leisure,  pressure. 

The  alphabetic  signs  are  used  in  these  words  : 

Neighbor,  saber,  able,  enable,  unable,  disable,  rabble,  sable, 
table,  dabble,  babble,  bible,  bauble,  papal,  paper,  chapel,  pauper, 
maker,  raker,  wriggle,  boggle,  draggle,  toggle,  tackle,  wiggle, 
tattle,  tatter,  tutor,  prattle,  brittle,  brutal,  favor,  savor,  fever, 
never,  lover,  deliver,  silver,  leather,  lather,  rather,  gather, 
bother,  harbor. 

SEC.  11.    THE  S-CIRCLE  SERIES. 

The  sound  of  -s  unites  with  that  of  some  other  letters  both 
initially  and  finally.  In  such  cases  it  is  represented  by  a 

% 


24  THE  HAND-BOOK 

circle  written   on  the  right  and  upper  side  of   the  straight 
lines,  and  on  the  inside  of  the  curves  : 

I  \          Q —        J          o  Q~s         _x   or    CLX 

Sp          sk          st        sf        sm          sn  si          si 


spy      sky      stay  sphere  small    snow    sleet      slap     sway 

bNo-^^-li^-J?^ 
ps        ks  (x)        ts  fs          ths          ns  Is          rs 

On  the  end  of  the  heavy  signs  the  circle  is  written  for  z,  as 
also  on  the  liquids,  Em,  En,  El  and  Ar. 


Bz     gz       dz        vz        thz      mz      ngz        nz         lz     rz 

SEC.  12.  THE  CIRCLE  USED  MEDIALLY. 
When  the  circle  occurs  between  two  straight  signs  it  is 
written  on  the  outside  of  the  angle.  Between  a  straight 
and  a  curved  sign  it  is  on  the  inside  of  the  curves  ;  and  be- 
tween two  curves  it  is  written  on  the  inside  of  both  ;  other- 
wise it  is  written  as  most  convenient,  as  will  be  seen  in  the 
following  illustration  and  examples. 

Illustration. 


The  circle  is  used  primarily  in  cases  where  it  unites 
with  th.e  consonant  without  an  intervening  vowel.  But  its 
use  is  also  extended  to  cases  where  an  obscure  vowel  or  small 
or  short  u  occurs  between  the  s  and  the  letter  to  which  it  is 
attached. 


OF  TAKIGRAFY. 25 

Examples. 

£•  ^  D  O 

N=        &         -*         ^-        -t-        ^ 

Guess       ashes     luscious       wages         scepter     section 
Examples. 

£- 


KEY. 

1. — Breast,  guest,  desk,  rest,  crest,  west,  blest. 
2. — Zest,  nest,  test,  drest,  trusty,  chest. 
3. — Success,  succession,  secession,  procession,  retrocession, 
posseses. 

SEC.  13.    THE  CIRCLE  BEFORE  THE  COMPOUNDS  OP  THE  El 

AND  Ar  SERIES. 

Between  two  straight  letters  the  circle  on  the  left  or  upper 
side  implies  the  r  ;  in  other  cases  when  the  circle  occurs  be- 
tween any  sign,  and  the  compound  of  the  El  or  Ar  Series, 
the  hook  appears. 

Examples. 


Excrete    exclude  express  bespread     restrain    describe 

&.  —  Es  BEFORE  COMPOUNDS  OF  THE  El  AND  Ar  SERIES. 
In  the  Simple  Style  of  Takigrafy  the  Alphabet  form  of 
the  Es  is  used  before  compounds  of  the  El  and  Ar  Series, 
wherever  the  circle  is  not  convenient. 

Examples. 
Extreme          explore       disclaim       abstract          fiscal 


26 


THE  HAND-BOOK 


Rem.  1.— If  a  vowel  precedes  «  in  the  beginning  of  a  word,  or  follows 
it  in  the  end,  the  long  sign  is  used,  except  ha  a  few  cases  where  the  vowel 
may  be  joined  to  the  circle. 


astronomy        ostensible    auspicious 

Kern.  2.— When  two  vowels  cr  a  diphthong  precede  *  the  long  sign  is  used 
as  in 


Science 


congruous 


theism 


theistic 


SEC.  14.    THE  TERMINATIONS  ion,  ier,  nre,  &c. 

The  terminations  ion,  ier,  and  ure,  are  generally  written 
yon,  yer  and  yure ;  so  also  yu  is  used  for  w-long  in  many 
cases.  The  words  brazier,  glazier  and  measure,  pleasure,  &c., 
are  written  mezhr,  plezhr,  &c. 

For  convenience  sake,  oo  is  written  for?t-long  after  Ya.  and 
in  some  other  cases  where  it  is  more  convenient,  as  in  the 
•words  communion,  community,  &c. 

Examples. 

r? 


KEY. 

1. — Christian,  clothier,  natural,  measure,  treasure. 

2. — Communion,  community,  opinion,  unite. 

Rem.  1.— A  few  word-signs  and  phrase-signs  are  used  in  the  Simple  Style, 
and  obscure  and  unaccented  vowels  are  omitted  wherever'they  are  not 
necessary  to  legibility.  For  these  features  and  an  elaboration  of  the  princi- 
ples briefly  sketched  in  the  preceding  pages,  the  student  is  refen  -d  to  the 
Elements  of  Takigrafy  and  the  Manual,  which  shud  be  studied  by  a,!  persons 
who  wish  to  use  Takigrafy  for  correspondence  or  for  business  purposes  of 
any  kind. 

Rem.  2. — Those  desiring  to  pass  through  the  Simple  Style  merely  as  an 
introduction  to  the  Contracted  Style  will  find  it  to  their  advantage  to 


i    -1 


OF  TAKIGRAFY.  27 

reduce  it  pretty  thoroughly  to  practice  before  taking  up  the  contractions. 
The  supposition  that  it  is  a  loss  of  time  to  do  so,  is  not  supported  by 
experience.  A  thorough  mastery  of  the  Simple  Style,  is  the  very  best 
preparation  to  success  in  the  Contracted  Style. 

Rem.  3.— The  Simple  Style  may  be  written  at  the  rate  of  80  to  100  words  a 
minute,  and  even  more  rapidly  than  this,  and  the  student  should  not  re- 
gard himself  as  having  successfully  reduced  this  style  to  practice  until  he 
can  write  at  least  70  to  80  words  a  minute. 

Rem.  4. — For  reading  lessons  hi  the  Simple  Style,  which  are  necessary  to 
a  full  view  of  this  style,  see  the  Takigrafer,  issued  serially,  at  one  dollar  a 
year. 

SEC.  15.  SHORTENED  FORMS  USED  IN  THE  SIMPLE  STYLE. 
In  the  practical  use  of  the  Simple  Style  obscure  and  unac- 
cented vowels  are  generally  omitted  ;  also  the  dot  vowels  and 
the  disjoined  dashes,  wherever  they  are  not  necessary  to  legi- 
bility. More  than  half  of  the  vowels  may  be  safely  omitted 
by  the  proficient  writer  of  this  Style,  and  in  some  words  of 
frequent  occurrence  all  the  vowels  may  be  dropped. 

Words  in  which  the  vowels  are  omitted  : 

I  I 

Be,been        up 


Am,may     an,on       are        we       were        where    you        he  here 

The  following  may  be  used  as  word-signs  in  the  Simple  Style  : 

a ~J          O  _  /  ^f  s        '-^  U  •>  A 

Which        will     as,is      who          all     how       of      the     have     in        ye 

>-          s  c         T^L        c^          t^          c?       y~i 

And          could        should        that        would        what          had      his,has 
Phrases  formed  Hby  connecting  the  above  : 

-*•'  Va.        — i       i        ^        *—       <^       S*          •? 
Of  the,  in  the,  to  the,  of  all,  of  this,    of  which,  we  had,  he  has,  who  has. 


Ihave  J)een,  to  dp,  that(is,  they  have,  this  is,  that  was,  it  may  be  so,  you  and  I. 

/— 


You  should  be,  what  is  that,  what  would  you  do,  where  is  she,   here  she  is. 
Other  shortened  forms  admissible  in  the  Simple  Style. 

^^^*^  Q  -X""*  /*~~~  /^~ 

It  is  now,          I  was,     use,  u#e       of  some,      the  same,        at  any  time. 


28 


THE  HAND-BOOK 


J- 


u 


\ 


J_  X1  L-V^  X^  oi    \ 
J—  /V  V  iA^ v 

\_^_/~~/      <^C_x  cf ^    *        ^ 

^^_J  \J  ^t  '  ^^7  /  ^ 

v  n  V-^  ^r—  V^ 

Xl_  >x^  UA^^  ^  n. 

'L_ 

r^      ^_      1       VX^V         I  "H. 

C^~l  Q •? 


y 


v  -v^  - 

cy/Vcy 
ix  /r* 


^. 
^o 


Vo  o_  ^_^.   ^7    N^t, 

^^V 


CONTRACTED  STYLE. 


CHAPTER     I. — WORD-SIGNS. 

The  abbreviations  employed  in  the  contracted  style  of  Ta- 
kigrafy  may  be  classed  under  the  following  divisions :  1st, 
Word-signs :  3d,  General  contractions  ;  3d,  Prefixes  and  Af- 
fixes ;  4th,  Phrase-signs. 

SEC.  16.  CLASSES  OF  WORD-SIGNS. 

Definition.— {A  word-sign  is  a  Takigrafic  word-form  short- 
ened by  omitting  some  of  the  letters  used  in  writing  it  fully. 

Word-signs  are  formed  by  special  and  sometimes  irregular 
modes  of  contraction,  which  apply  only  to  the  words  spe- 
cified, or  to  their  derivatives. 

The  characters  used  for  word-signs  are, — a.  Letters  of  the 
Takigrafic  alphabet,  b,  Compound  signs,  c,  Combined  signs. 
d,  Signs  irregularly  contracted,  e,  Contracts.  /,  Common 
abbreviations. 

Class  b  consists  of  the  secondary  letters  of  the  El,  Ar,  and 
Es-series  of  compounds.  Class  c  contains  a  consonant  and  a 
vowel.  Class  d  comprises  word-signs  which  employ  one  or 
more  of  the  final  letters  of  the  word.  Class  e  contains  two 
or  more  consonants.  Class  /  contains  common  abbreviations 
such  as  A.  B.,  P.  M. 

Note.  Classes  a,  b  and  c  are  combined  with  Tables  2  and  3.  Classes  d,  e 
and  /  correspond  with  Tables  4,  6  and  1. 

Word-signs  may  be  further  classed  as  Primitives  and 
Derivatives.  A  Primitive  word-sign  is  the  simplest  form  in 
which  it  occurs ;  a  Derivative  word-sign  is  any  modification 
of  such  Primitive  form.  A  table  of  Primitive  word-signs  is 
given  below,  with  a  few  specimens  of  derivative  signs. 

29 


30 


THE  HAND-BOOK 


Note. — General  principles  of  contraction  enter,  in  some  cases,  into  the 
formation  of  word-signs.  These  principles  are  explained  in  succeeding 
chapters. 

Letters  writhen  half-length  imply  a  t  or  d  after  them.  Lengthened  curves 
imply  dr  or  tr— a  double  circle,  s-s  or  s-z—a,  small  final  hook  n.  There  are 
also,  other  forms  of  contraction  which  are  explained  in  their  proper  place. 

Rem.  Words  derived  from  those  given  in  the  table  are  written  by  adding 
prefixes  or  affixes  which  are  explained  in  future  chapters.  A  few  examples 
are  given. 


TABLE     OF     WORD-SIGNS. 


1. — COMMON  ABBREVIATIONS. 


* 

Mr. 

c      1      A.  B. 

^ 

Mrs. 

c  A.  D. 

r 

Miss. 

c   S~     A.  M. 

p 

Master 

f~  •    M.  D. 

X> 

Rev. 

)    Ph.    D. 

-1 

Hon. 

1    /^~      P.  M. 

0 

Prof. 

1.  x-s,      P.  S. 

% 

Sec'y 

D.  D. 

3, 

Pres't 

-^^   D.  C. 

^> 

Gov. 

^~^^    M.  C. 

\ 

Capt. 

1  —  *,     B.  C. 

V 

Exec'r 

1   x        P.  0. 

Jan. 
Feb. 
March 

April 

May 

June 

July 

Aug. 

Sept. 

Oct. 
Nov. 
Dec. 


OF  TAKIGRAFY. 


31 


2.  —  VOCAL  SIGNS. 

n      ye 

"      who               V     high 

L.  "^  there 

o     if 

x     all                 y     why 

-wi  the 

0      in 

^     of                  ^,     employ 

o     as,  is 

u     have 

^      he                >./    (  how,  out 
|  without 

p     has,  his 

3. 

—  SINGLE  CONSONANT  STEMS. 

B.P. 
I      be,  been 

D.  T. 

A      opportunity 

dollar 

I    by 
\     object 

n      principle-al 

fj  speak 
"1  special              *•  — 

idle,  idea 
head 

1     above 

p     suspect               4  r 

already 

*j     about 

V  habit 

1(  brother 
\  brief 

0     stipulate             c  

<«.K.  (  give-n               g- 
X  \  together 

\    altogeher                c 

dear 

jdull 
\  deliver 

take 

1     subject 

S,  slory              ~^ 

taken 

f     establish 

^     signify                 c— 

truth 

O    business 

>.       (begui                 c_ 
o    \  begun 

tell,  till 

up,  hope 

x)    began                 Q  — 

still 

1     happy 
happen 

\     kingdom             ° 
|  account 
^\   tac^ordiog          <c~v 

strong 
dwell 

"1      opinion 

\      school                ^^ 

between 

32 


THE  HAND-BOOK 


-V.F. 
) 

very 

~~^     thing,  think 

while 

9 

average 

v*«-.     thank                  v 

last 

3 

evening 

*^\     hath                      & 

least 

5 

several 

MHM 

f~    may,  more 

houi*  our 

j 

value 

rf    immediate           / 

rule,  our 

) 
3 

for,  fact 
from 

V^~    him,  home 

W.XH. 

f       important          l^ 

reply 
we,  with 

9 

satisfy 

(  England                > 
'^  \  English             <^ 

you,  your 

<} 

first 

^-"    any                       <?s 

United  States 

i 

future 

^-*    now                      is 

yesterday 

SH 

them 

^^~   new                       A* 

heart 

\ 

thy 

U."R.                                      Ch-J. 
_y    Lord,  will           -- 

general 

^ 

either 

J     alone                  T_ 

generation 

°^ 

southern 

_5     Avhole                 c  

(  child 
(  which 

4.  —  IRREGULAR  SIGNS. 

( 

advantage 

s-~*  was 

^^   such                      ^ 

almost 

( 

wish 

^    much                    'V 

inherit 

•i 

injustice 

^   external               ry 

inward 

/ 

pleasure 

Ue    accomodate        •>* 

outward 

7 

7 

«ure 
shjeyt 

n  each                      ^2 
^      when                     ^ 

conversation 
and,  hand 

O 

oifi%l 

j>     always                     ; 

&c. 

OF  TAKIGRAFY. 


33 


CONTRACTS. 

E.P 

i 

behave 

fe 

companion 

j 

benevolent 

C 

accompany 

K 

benignant 

J, 

haphazard 

.K 

bethink 

f 

applicable 

J 

bespeak 

1 

probable 

i 

inhabitant 

1 

perhaps 

] 

breakfast 

\ 

practice 

1 

I 

brilliant 

I  public 
(  publish 

\ 
t 

prognosticate 
apprehend 

Jb 

passage 

^\ 

impregnable 

V 

passenger 

a 

implication 

t. 

postage 

; 

plenipotentiary 

I 

popular 

i> 

conspicuous 

^ 

peculiar 

; 

superincumbent 

L 

pecuniary 

L 

superintendent 

34 


THE  HAND-BOOK 


ci.K 

s 

govern 

^y        collect 

)o 

example 

°N.         correct 

X 

aggregate 

\p        expenditure 

vv 

congregate 

£,         consequence 

N 

T>.  T 

<\ 

gratitude 

^        difficult 

^ 

congratulate 

\      doctor 

v^ 

gubernatorial 

C        deficient 

«, 

signify-icant 

l''     denominate 

^ 

signature 

"~-^-      downward 

V 

suggest 

"">»      designate 

X 

capable 

—  OS.      discrepancy 

•'    n  \^)   discontinue 

^ 

culpable 

~^v       indignant 

N^>. 

because 

°\      indiscriminate 

\s/" 

become 

w   ^         derange 

N. 

became 

' 

"™^      delinquent 

v/\ 

character 

OF  TAKIGRAFY. 


35 


xr- 

contradict 

V*       form 

"^ 

contiguous 

P          efficient 

T 

contemporaneous 

y          sufficient 

p  

constitute 

i.          fourth 

*~> 

integrity 

^»          forward 

•( 

'**• 

intangible 

\          afterward 

/a  — 

instruct 

1__       infidel 

—* 

intelligent 

2  —  .      infatuate 

«HL 

strength 

^j          inoffensive 

V.  F 

? 

vegetable 

5           frequent 

\ 

vocabulary 

l^     engineer 

I 

vengeance 

2        usual 

^ 

volume 

V^«         thanksgiving 

] 

involve 

/'"I         ambiguous 

JL 

overwhelm 

/^\       magazine 

i 

figure 

(2         malignant 

36 


THE  HAND-BOOK 


manipulate 
^*f        monopoly 

(^        manufacture 

x-^~ 

r  memorandum 

v*~l  number 

s-"\  neglect 

"~V-?  nevertheless 

s_^v— »  New  England 

— •<  knowledge 

newspaper 
nondescript 

notwithstanding 

endeavor 

individual 

intermediate 
length 


language 

represent 
re-public-ation-ish 

repugnant 

regular 

respect 

remark 

railroad 

exterior 

extraordinary 

world 

universe 

uniform 

unanimous 

union 

household 


OP  TAKIGRAFY. 


1. 


\  ^ 


c.l.     c  .  .  1882. 


— ..^.      1     1     1 


L 


% 


Of 


\ 


01 


c        / 


p 

U 


448595 


38 THE  HAND-BOOK 

KEY  TO  READING  LESSON  1. 

Exercise  on  the  Word-Signs. 

1. — The  way  of  the  righteous  is  as  a  shining  light. 

2.  —The  day,  the  time,  the  path,  the  goal,  the  glory,  the 
place,  the  praise.  3. — In  the,  on  the,  for  the,  to  the, 
though  the,  through  the,  have  the,  all  the. 

4.—  John  Jones,  A.  B.  A.  D.  1882.  Adam  Smith,  A.  M. 
(5)  in  account  with  Samuel  Sampson,  D.  D.J  The  Deputy  Post 
Master  General,  at  (6)  Washington,  D.  C.  Perhaps  the  prin- 
cipal object  in  our  meeting  together,  (7)  is  to  consider  the  sub- 
ject in  all  its  bearings.  A  knowledge  of  the  (8)  principles  of 
language  is  of  general  utility .  Notwithstanding  the  advantages 
of  the  (9)  measure  a  large  number  of  gentlemen  were  disposed 
to  call  it  (10)  in  question.  To  him  that  hath  shall  be  given,  and 
from  him  (11)  that  hath  not  shall  be  taken  even  that  which  he(12) 
seem eth  to  have.  They  have  taken  advantage  of  your  remarks. 

13. — A  large  number  of  persons  were  present.  Would  you 
be  wise,  (14)  five  things  observe  with  care,  of  whom  you  speak, 
to  whom  (15)  you  speak,  and  how,  and  when,  and  where. 


WRITING  EXERCISE  1. 

Write  the  following  with  the  signs  given  in  the  table. 

About  above  accommodate  accompany  according  account 
advantage  afterward  aggregate  all  almost  alone  already 
also  although  altogether  always  and  any  anything  appli- 
cable apprehend  ambiguous  ..  are  as  average.  Became 
become  because  began,  begin  begun  be  been  before 
benevolent  benignant  bespeak  bethink  between  breakfast 
brief  brilliant  brother  business  by.  Capable  character  child 
collect  companion  congratulate  congregate  consequent 
conspicuous  constitute  contiguous  contemporaneous  con- 
tradict conversation  correct  culpable.  Dear  deficient  deliver 
denominate  derange  delinquent  difficult  discontinue  dis- 
crepancy doctor  designate  dollar  downward  dull  dwell. 

Each  efficient  either  employ  endeavor  England  English 
engineer  establish  evening  example  expenditure  explain  ex- 
terior external  extraordinary.  Fact  figure  first  for  form  forth 
forward  frequent  future  from.  General  generation  give 


OF  TAKIGRAFY.  39 

given  glory  govern  gratitude  gubernatorial.  Habit  hand 
hap-hazard  happen  happy  has  hath  have  he  head  heart 
high  him  his  home  household  hope  how.  Idea  idle  if  in 
immediate  injustice  important  implication  impregnable 
indignant  indiscriminate  individual  infatuate  infidel  inha- 
bitant inherit  intermediate  inoffensive  instruct  intangible 
integrity  intelligent  involve  inward. 

Just.  Kingdom  knowledge.  La/iguage  last  least  length 
Lord.  Magazine  malignant  manipulate  manufacture  may 
memorandum  monopoly  much  more.  Neglect  never  never- 
theless new  newspaper  notwithstanding  number  nondes- 
cript now.  Object  official  opinion  opportunity  or  our  out 
outward  overwhelm.  Passage  passenger  postage  popular 
peculiar  pecuniary  perhaps  practice  probable  prognosticate 
pleasure  principal  principle  public  publish.  Regular  re- 
mark reply  represent  republic  republication  republish 
repugnant  respect  rule.  Satisiy  secretary  school  several 
short  signify  significant  signature  speak  'special  stipulate 
still  strength  subject  such  sufficient  suggest  southern 
superincumbent  superintendent  sure  suspect. 

Take  taken  tell  till  thank  thanksgiving  thing  think  them 
the  there  thy  together  truth.  Unanimous  uniform  union 
universe  usual.  Value  vegetable  vengeance  very  vocabu- 
lary volume.  When  which  while  who  whole  why  will 
wish  with  without  world.  Ye  yesterday  you  your. 

A.  B.  A.  D.  A.  M.  B.  C.  Capt.  D.  C.  D.  D.  Exec'r  Gov. 
Hon.  M.  C.  M.  D.  Ph.  D.  Master  Miss  Mr.  Mrs.  P.  M.  P.  O. 
P.  S.  Pres.  Prof.  Sec.  Jan.  Feb.  March  April  May  June 
July  August  Sept.  Oct.  Nov.  Dec. 

Write  these  derivatives  with  word-signs  with  added  letters. 

Advantages  objects  principles  manufactures  republics 
engineers.  Accountable  remarkable  having  employing  re- 
plying dwelling  engineering.  •  Objected  represented  respected. 
Hopeful  wilful  truthful.  Forever  whoever  however  when- 
ever. Immediately  generally  hourly  surely  shortly  officially. 
Former  collector  satisfactory  manufactory  manufacturer 
childish  glorify.  Idleness  newness  individuality. 


CHAPTER  II. — EXTENDED  USE  OF  THE  El  AND 

AT    HOOK-SIGNS   AND    OTHER    COMPOUNDS. 


SEC.  17.    ADDITIONAL  SIGNS. 

1.  —  In  addition  to  the  signs  of  the  El-audAr-  -Series,  used  in 
the  Simple  Style,  and  explained  in  Chapter  I,  we  have  the  fol- 
lowing large  hook  signs. 


Zhel    shel     mel       ingl       wel     whel       yel         hel       quel 

2.  —  The  signs  Qua,  Diva  and  Twa  have  small  hooks,  as  pre- 
viously given.  See  page  21. 

The  sign  Qua  is  shaded  to  imply  r  ;  and,  with  the  enlarged 
hook,  it  is  shaded  to  emply  rl,  as  in  the  examples  below. 

3.  —  The  series  of  the  r-hook  signs  may  be  completed  by 
using  the  hook  on  Em  for  mr,   the  tick  being  used  for  hm. 

Examples. 


Quail  dwindle  twaddle  murmur      farmer 

f       rtj       c\       ^^      c^x_    c«f 

Shelf      ambrosial    multiply      knowingly    wealth     whelm 


Yellow         help  quality      equality       acquire          querl 

Rem.  1.— Observe,  that  Quel  is  reversed  when  it  is  preceded  by  E-\ong. 
Hem.  2.— These  signs  Qua  Dwa  and  Twa  excepted,  are  not  strictly  fonetic  in 
their  use.  They  admit  a  vowel  between  the  letters  represented  by  the  com- 
pound sign.  They  do  not,  however,  allow  the  introduction  of  long  un- 
accented vowels.  It  would  not  do  to  use  these  signs  in  such  words  as  shoal, 
shawl,  wheel,  weal,  Yale,  &c.  though  acquire  forms  an  exception  to  the 
general  rule. 

40 


THE  HAND-BOOK  41 

4.  —  Hooked  Signs  for  zl  and  si. 

Zl  and  si  are  generally  written  with  the  circle  on  I,  but 
there  are  a  few  cases  in  which  hooked  signs  may  be  used  with 
advantage. 

Examples. 

<T\  <TN  _£TN  vjTN  ^^  r—x 

Zl  si  dazzle  nozzle         Russell        tassel 

Rem.—  These  are  new  signs  in  Takigrafy,  being  introduced  into  the  Hand 
Book  for  the  first  time.  As  they  are  not  indispensable,  the  circle  can  be  used 
in  their  place,  by  such  writers  as  prefer  to  do  so. 

SEC.  18.    LARGE  INITIAL  HOOKS  ON  THE  STRAIGHT  SIGNS. 

Some  writers  enlarge  the  hook  of  the  r-  series  of  compounds 
on  the  straight  stems  to  imply  I,  and  the  I-  hook  to  imply  r, 
f  orming  the  following  additional  signs. 

pp          ^^         rjrjcXCXcr-c- 
Bier  pier       gler  cler      brel    prel    grel     crel       drel   trel 
Examples. 

V-       "X          <  _/T 


prelacy    collateral    inaugural        clergy        bugler     templar 

Rem.—  These  signs  are  not  considered  as  either  necessary  or  important, 
still  they  furnish  convenient  outlines  for  some  words,  and  do  not  conflict 
with  any  other  signs. 

SEC.  19.    LARGE  INITIAL  HOOK  ON  Ve  AND  Ef. 
A  large  initial  hook  is  used  on  Ve  and  Ef,  to  indicate  the 
syllables  pre  and  pro,  as  in  prefix,  provoke. 
Examples. 

'X        <V      0          Q_        0.        0- 

Previous        prefer      profess       profit        provide        previse 
For  other  words  in  which  this  hook  is  used  see  writing  ex- 

ercise 2. 

SEC.  20.    Zhe  AND  Zher  USED  FOR  Ja  AND  Jer. 
Zhe  and  Ish  are  used  for  Ja  and  Cha  in  some  cases,  and 

more  especially  for  nj.    ZJier,  and  Sher,  are  in  like  manner 

used  for^'r,  and  chr,  and  Zhel  forjl, 


42  THE  HAND-BOOK. 


Examples. 

-7      3 

Agile     angel      danger      teacher      fragile    French    bachelor 

Rem. — These  signs  are  employed  only  for  convenience  and  brevity,  and  in 
"cases  where  they  are  not  convenient,  the  full  forms  shud  be  used  in  their 
place. 

SEC.  21.      MISCELLANEOUS     COMPOUNDS,  Emp,    El-r,      Rel, 

Arch,   Arj. 
1. — Both  Em  and  Ma,  are  shaded  to  imply  p,  as  in 

jr      k-      T       °r     ^    ^ 

limp          pump        trump          stump         tramp          stamp 

2. — Both  El  and  La  are  shaded  to  imply  r,  tar  and  ier,  J?a  is 
shaded  to  imply  I,  and  Ar  to  imply  ch  and  j. 
Examples. 

O        ^        -^~1       l/^     ~^7 

Miller       familiar        relative         barrel         torch         charge 

Rem. — Ar  is  shaded  near  the  end  only  to"  imply  ch,  as  will  be  seen  in  the 
examples :  but  is  shaded  throughout  for  rj. 

SEC.  22.    USE  OF  THE  COMPOUND  SIGNS. 

The  signs  of  the  El,  Ar  and  Es  series  of  compounds  are  purely  diph- 
thongal,— that  is  they  are  uttered  with  one  impulse  of  the  voice,  in  such 
words  as  play,  pray  and  spy.  In  these  cases  the  compound  sign  is  always 
used  for  pi,  pr  and  sp. 

Bl  in  the  word  noble,  and  nel  in  the  word  kennd,  are  less  closely  united 
than  bl,  in  the  word  blow,  and  are  examples  of  a  secondary  use  of  the  com- 
pound sign,  as  is  also  the  she  in  luscious,  ys  in  righteous,  &c. 

The  letters  rj  in  charge,  rch  in  church,  mp  in  pump,  Ir  in  miller,  and  rl  in 
barrel,  &c.,  are  also  united  in  sound,  and  are  written  by  the  use  of  the 
compound  signs  previously  explained. 

Where  a  vowel  occurs  between  the  two  letters  indicated  by  the  compound 
sign,  we  have  a  second  step  of  departure  from  the  purely  diphthongal  use 
of  the  signs,  and  this  divergence  is  increased  by  every  increase  of  the 
openness  or  length  of  the  vowel  inserted.  It  is  a  greater  departure  from  the 
correct  principles  of  writing  to  use  a  compound  sign  where  a  long  vowel  in- 
v  tervenes,  like  a  or  o,  than  with  a  short  vowel,  like  e-short  or  i-short.  Only 
short  and  obscure  vowels  are  generally  allowed  to  be  introduced  between 
the  compounds  of  the  I  and  r  series. 


OF  TAKIGRAFY.  43 


We  have  then  these  principles  of  joining  : 

GENERAL  PRINCIPLES. 

1.  —  The  signs  of  the  L  and  R  series  of  compounds   are  used  ; 
a  —  Where  purely  fonetic  or  diphthongal.      6  —  With  the 
first  and  slightest  departure  from  their  fonetic  use.     c  —  In 
exceptional  cases  only,  where  the  letters  of  the  compound  are 
separated  by  a  clearly  pronounced  vowel,     d  —  Still  more  ex- 
ceptional,  where  the    intervening   vowel    is    either  long  or 
accented. 

Rein.—  A  fifth  case  may  be  noted  in  the  old  Fonografy,  where  two  vowels 
or  a  diphthong  are  inserted  between  the  parts  of  a  compound  sign.  This  is 
never  allowed  in  Takigrafy. 

These  principles  will  be  better  understood  from  the  follow- 
ing applications  : 

2.  According  to  these  principles  the  kla  may  be  used  in 
culture,  collect,  college,  but  not  in  keel,  cole,  chyle.    The  kra 
may  be  used  in  corner,  kernel  ;  but  not  in  core,  cure  ;  and  Tel 
may  be  used  in  tell,  till,  more  appropriately  than  in  tale,  tile, 

3.  —  The  use  of  the  compound  in  call,  dear  and  sure,  tho  tol- 
erated, is  contrary  to  these  rules,  as  is  the  use  of  the  circle  in 
the  words  case,  seen,  south,  use,  house,  theze,  uze,  haz.     Such 
exceptions  are  admitted,  only  in  case  of  words  of  frequent 
occurrence. 

4.  —  It  must  not  be  inferred  that  the  compound  is  to  be  always 
used  wherever  it  is  theoretically  allowable.     It  is  allowable 
in  the  words  current,  curage,  &c.,  but  the  full  form  is  more 
convenient. 

SEC.  23.    THE  TICK  USED  FOR  Ha,  Wha  AND  FINAL  y. 

1.  —  The  stem  of  the  Ha  and  Wha  is  omitted  before  De,  Ve, 
Ef,  Ith,  The,  Ma,  Em  and  El,  and  the  tick  used  for  these 
letters. 

2.  —  When  h  precedes  the  Mer,  it  may  be  written  by  thick- 
ening the  hook. 

Examples. 


J 


Whole        while  head  heavy          half  hath 


44 


THE  HAND-BOOK 


Him    homely    hemp    humor  humorously  whim  whimsical 

3.  —  In  the  Contracted  Style,  when  written  at  all,   final  y  ia 

written  by  the  tick  or  the  full  vowel  ;  the  hook  being  reserved 

for  the  en-  and  in-  hooks.     When  medial,  the  short  i,  and  short 

vowels  generally,  are  omitted. 

Examples. 


Ditty         lady        folly      volley        bony        fairy        sully 
4.  —  The  stem  of  the  Wa  may  be  omitted  before  Ma  and  Errip, 


swim  swamp  woman  wampum 

Rem.— These  outlines  can  be  easily  made  with  a  little  practice  ;  though 
if  any  one  finds  them  difficult,  the  full  forms  can  be  used  Instead. 


OF  TAKIGRAFY. 


45 


^\ 


^^^ 


'  -\  . 


,v-  ^ 

-^_^- 


¥^\        J> 


p> 


c^L*y  —  \ 
7  «^_  . 


46  THE  HAND-BOOK 

WRITING  EXERCISE  2. 

The  large  hooks  are  used  on  Ma,  En,  Ing,  Wa,   Ya,    Ha. 

ZHEL,  SHEL,  MBL. — Ambrosial  official  shall  shell  shelf  shelve 
multifarious  multiform  multilateral  multiple  multiply 
multiplicity  multiplication  mellifluous  melancholy. 

Rem.— The  hook  is  not  used  in  multitude  and  its  derivatives,  nor  in  the 
words  malefactor,  military,  &c. 

INQLY. — Alarmingly  amazingly  approvingly  carres  singly 
charmingly  doubtingly  jeeringly  jestingly  knowingly  laugh- 
ingly swimmingly  kingly  strongly. 

WEL,  YEL,  HEL. — Welcome  welfare  well-known  well- 
spring  well-wisher  will-worship  well  will  wealth  whelm. 
Yellow  yelp  yell  yellowish  help  helpful  helpless  hell-hound . 

QWA,  DWA,  TWA, — Quick  quarry  quoin  quarto  queer 
equip  equipoise  equity  quire  quiet  quietude  twang  twain 
tweak  tweed  twelve  twig  dwindle. 

QUEL,  EQUEL,  QUER. — Qualify  qualitative  qualificative  equal 
equally  quality  equality  equalness  unequal  unequally  unqual- 
ifiedly inequality.  Querulous  require  inquire  acquire  querl. 

ZEL,  SEL. — Dazzle  hustle  tussle  tassel  Russell  nozzle  drizzle. 

Use  the  circle  in  muscle,  wrestle,  vassal,  and  the  'Ze,-El,  in 
puzzle,  fizzle,  guzzle,  grizzle  frizzle,  &c, 

BLER,  PLER,  ULER,  CLER. — Blur  pillar  feebler  cobbler 
tippler  color  clerk  clergy  clergyman  poplar  scholar 
templar  tumbler  gambler  mumbler  grumbler  humbler 
nobler  troubler  scribbler  quibbler. 

Not  used  where  a  vowel  follows  the  r,  as  in  gallery,  pillory. 

BREL,  PREL,  GREL,  DREL,  TREL. — April  pearl  drill  drill- 
ing trilling  neutral  central  sprawl  scrawl.  Prelacy  pre- 
liminary quadrille  liberal  illiberal  corporal  inaugural 
electoral  collateral  collaterally  impearled  temporal  tem- 
porally liberally  illiberally  terrestrial  industrial-ly-ism. 
— Not  used  in  girl  curl  nor  in  droll  trail  trial  etc. 

The  large  initial  hook  on  Ve  and  Ef. 

Prefigure  prefix  prevail  prevent.  Profane  profuse  proverb 
province  provoke  profound  prefer  preferable  previous  previ- 
ously previse  profess  professor  professedly  profusely  pro- 
fuseness  proverbial  provide  provokingly. 


OF  TAKIGRAFY.  47 

Y  GHER,  JEL,  CHEL. — Teacher  preacher  journey  journal 
Agile  angel  angelic  bachelor  flagellate  fragile  vigil. 

EMP. — Bump  pump  camp  damp  tamp  samp  thump  lamp 
lump  limp  romp  wampum  hemp  jump  champ  stamp  en- 
stamp  tramp  encamp  vamp. 

ER,  IAR,  URE. —  Miller  taller  tailor  collar  cooler  familiar 
failure  frailer  sailor  snarler  parlor  similar  smaller. 

REL. — Relish  relax  religious  barrel  apparel  coral  moral 
oral  quarrel  squirrel  pearl  furl  unfurl  curl  girl  gnarl  marl. 
Not  used  in  aerial  real  reel  royal  roll  rule  rail  early  &c. 

ARCH,  AROE. —  Arch  march  scorch  torch  porch  birch 
church  smirch  search  charge  barge  large  marriage  courage 
courageous  encourage  discourage  merge  dirge  gorge  scourge. 

The  tick  for  HA  and  WHA:  — Whole  wholesome  while  whelm 
heavy  halve  hoof  heath  heather  hath  him  hymn  home 
whim  whimsical  hemp  humor  humorously. 

The  tick  for  i  short :  Ditty  oddity  dirty  lady  booty  ferry 
fairy  very  bony  money  downy  shiny. 


WRITING  EXERCISE  3. 

Use  the  signs  of  the  L  and  .R-series  in  the  final  syllables  : 

Bubble  pebble  pepper  people  blubber  probable  proper 
buckle  bigger  beggar  bugle  beaker  breaker  broker  bleaker 
picker  pucker  progress  bottle  peddle  poodle  puddle  petal 
prodigal  putter  baffle  bevel  Bristol  brutal  bushel. 

Cable  copal  couple  grapple  scribble  scruple  goiter  cockle 
crackle  cuttle  cuttler  gravel  graver  clever  gather  gainer 
gunner  kennel  grapnel. 

Double  trouble  trooper  toggle  trickle  debter  tetter  total 
treadle  straddle  travel  drummer  tunnel  tenor  treacherous 
evil  awful  oval. 

Fable  affable  feeble  vocal  vicar  vapor  voucher  fickle  fisher 
frivelous  shovel  shuffle,  civil  civility  sober  supple  social  other 
thermal  farmer. 

Maker  meeker  miracle  medal  metal  mirthful  moover 
muffler  knocker  novel  novelty  rebel  revel  rioter  level 
limner  rudder  rumor  hovel  harper  harsher  wrecker  weevil. 


48  THE  HAND-BOOK 


The  full  forms  are  preferred  in  the  following  words 

Enable  unable  dabble  dapple  taper  trapper  draper  dormer 
pummel  guitar  frizzle  vail  avail  veal  vial  vile  avowal  fail 
feel  fool  foal  file  foil  fowl  favor  shawl  shoal  shield  essen- 
tial labor  liver  lively  neighbor. 

The  following  words  may  be  written  either  in  full  or  with 
the  compound  signs. 

Able  bable  babble  pauper  Bible  Papal  blabber  paper  pauper 
pickle  bladder  batter  beadle  beetle  brittle  paddle  prattle 
bother  botcher. 

Cattle  clatter  cobble  dribble  dinner  draper  table  tickle  titter 
tatter  toddle  tottle  tittle  dimmer  trimmer  dreamer  streamer 
tumor  hammer  hobble. 

Frippery  flipper  shrubbery   enamor   rumor  lamer  shimmer 

swimmer  mocker  nickle  wiggle  wriggle. 

»• 
The  signs  of  the  I-  and  r-series  in  initial  syllables  embracing 

a  vowel : 

Calomel  calamity  calcareous  calumny  collector  college 
coliseum  collateral  colporter  colloquial  colurnbiad.  Marvel 
marble  mercenary  marshal  mortal  mercy  murmur. 

Valet  valid  value  valve  volatile  vulgar.  Carnal  kernel 
corner  corporal  cartridge  fervor  perjurer  purple. 

Call  dear  full  care  till  until  sure  surely  ensure  philosophy 
philology  pilgrim  Delaware  telegram  telescope  pulverize 
pell-mell  pilfer  belfry  bell  bill  curdle  girdle  deluge  Delhi 
delible  tolerable  tolerate  valor  fulfil  devolve  revolve. 

Use  the  full  forms  in  the  first  syllable  : 

Carbonate  caravan  carbuncle  carcass  cardinal  carnage 
coral  carp  carriage  cornice  corona  coroner  corrosive.  Delineate 
delirum  delude  delusive  delve. 

Fardel  farthing  farinaceous  ferocious  fertile  ferriage 
ferule  fare-well  forbear  forage  foreknowledge  forestall  fur- 
nace furbish  hyperbola  palpable  parallel  perish  purpose 
purchase  purify  colossus  valley  voley  volume  voluble. 


CHAPTER  III. — THE  USE  OF  THE  CIRCLE. 


SEC.  24.    THE  CIRCLE  BEFORE  Ra,  Wa  AND  Ha, 
1. — In  the  commencement  of  a  word  the  circle  is  •written  on 

the  under  side  of  the  Ra  for  sr,  and  on  the  upper  side  for  sw  ; 

but  in  the  midst  of  a  word,  the  hook  of  the  Wa  must  appear, 

and  the  sr  may  have  the  circle  on  either  side. 
2. — The  circle  may  be  written  on  the  backside  of  the  curve 

in  such  combinations  as  Em-s-Wa,  Es-s-Wa,  &c. 
3. — In  such  words  as  Soho,  Sahara,  the  long  sign  is  more 

convenient  for  s  than  the  circle,  though  the  circle  can  be  used 

in  the  hook  if  preferred. 

Examples. 


SEC.  25.    S  BEFORE  COMPOUNDS  OF  THE  El  SERIES  AND 

Ja  AND  Cha. 

1. — Initial  S  followed  by  a  compound  of  the  El  series,  Ja  or 
Cha,  is  best  "written  by  the  long  sign  in  most  cases,  as  in 


sickly         supply  sage  satchel          sidle          Civil 

2.  —  The  circle  can  be  written  in  the  large  hooks,  as  in 


e_         e— 

settle        saddle 


social 


swell 


squall         squirrel 

49 


50  THE  HAND-BOOK 

3. — Preceeded  by  another  consonant  the  circle  is  used  when- 
ever convenient,  and  a  connecting  stroke  may  be  used  in  a 

few  cases. 

Examples. 


Exclaim  exchange  exaggerate  possible   misjudge    mischief 

C <£ <^  <5>  e —  e 

Postal        Bristol        briskly        Paschal       passage      beseech 


Fiscal      physical      misplace    discipline     disclose    displace 
Rem.— When  Pla  follows  Ex,  as  in  explain,  the. circle  is  omitted. 

SEC.  26.    THE  CIRCLE  BEEORE  COMPOUNDS  OF  THE  Ar  SERIES. 
1. — The  circle  is  used  on  the  left  and  upper  side  of  the 
straight  stems  implying  the  hook  of  the  Ar  series. 

1  1  °\  °\  a—  cr—  J 

s-br      s-pr          s-gr          skr  s-dr  str     s-shr,  s-chr 

Spring      supper      sober      screw    stream      sadder      sucker 
2. — Used    medially,    the    hook    is    inferred    between    two 
straight  signs  in  the  same  direction.     In  other  cases  the  hook 
appears. 

Examples. 


\ 


Prosper    distress        express    describe      restrain      unstrung 
3. — The  following  cases  should  be  observed. 


Bskr  bsk  bstr  bst  kstr  kst 

As  the  use  of  the  circle  on  the  inside  of  the  angle  is  less  con- 
venient, the  r  is  frequently  omitted  in  cases  like  the  above. 
In  some  cases  the  long  sign  is  used  instead  of  the  circle. 


OF  TAKIGRAFY. 


51 


Examples. 


Subscribe 


obstruct 


offspring 


extreme 


Subscribe      obstruct      mainspring      offspring        unscrew 

SEC.  27.    THE  CIRCLE  USED  FOR  Z. 

1. — The  circle  is  used  for  the  sound  of  z,  with  nearly  the  same 
freedom  as  for  s  ;  and  the  long  sign  is  used  for  z  when  preceded 
by  a  vowel  in  the  commencement  of  a  word,  or  followed  by  a 
vowel  in  the  ending  of  a  word,  the  same  as  with  s. 

Examples. 


zone 


risen 


business 


prase      prize 

2.  —  The  circle  is  used  for  z,  attached  to  vocal  signs  in  some 
cases. 

SEC.  28.    THE  VOCALIZATION  OF  WORDS  CONTAINING  THE 
CIRCLE,  &c. 

The  matter  of  vocalizing  stems  which  contain  a  circle,  and 
of  indicating  the  use  of  vocals  between  the  parts  of  a  com- 
pound of  the  I  or  r  series  will  be  understood  from  the  following 
examples.  The  vocals  are  generally  omitted  in  such  cases. 


Sake 


sad 


a 

sober 


call 


tell 


till 


52  THE  HAND-BOOK. 


Submissive    unsuccessful        unsatisfying         statistician 

SEC.  29.    THE  CIRCLE  USED  ON  THE  VOCAL  SIGNS. 

The  circle  may  be  used  after  a  vocal  sign  both  initially  and 
finally. 

Examples. 


Acid      astonish      asp     ask  assume  assail    assign  associate 


iate 


Pursue  phraisee  loose  nice           voice         spruce 

.__  y3 

~~»o  v^—  to                                       '    X^,                   /v, 

Joys  annoys               lose               size                 views 


SEC.  30.    THE    DOUBLE  SIZED  CIRCLE. 

1.  —  The  circle  is  made  twice  its  usual  size  to  represent  s-s  or 
s-z  with  any  intervening  vocal  :  the  double  circle  is  generally 
used  to  represent  ses,  sis,  SMS  and  sear,  as  in  the  words. 

Suspend         necessity        senses          analysis  accessible 

2.  —  The  double  circle  may  be  used  in  such  words  as  analysis, 
and  generally  where  practical  ;  but  the  single  circle  followed 
by  the  long  sign  Es  is  frequently  preferred. 

Examples 


Society      Cesarea        thesis        theses      process       recess 


OF  TAKIGBAFY.  53 


SEC.  31    THE  CIRCLE  AND  LONG  SIGN. 

In  determinining  whether  the  circle  should  be  used  or  not, 
the  student  should  keep  in  mind  general  principles  whch  ap- 
ply to  a  certain  extent  throughout  the  entire  system.  See 
Sec.  22. 

The  circle  admits  of  more  liberty  than  the  compounds  of  the 
L  and  R  series,  and  is  used  with  long  vowels  in  some  cases  ; 
but  attention  to  the  following  specifications  will  increase  the 
legibility  of  the  writing. 

1.  —  Words  containing  but  two  consonant  letters,  one  of 
which  is  s,  follow  for  the  most  part,  the  principles  of  the 
Simple  Style  ;  that  is,  they  use  the  circle  when  no  vowel  in- 
tervenes between  the  s  and  the  stem  letter  as  in  spy,  hopes, 
or  where  only  a  short  vowel  intervenes,  as  in  does,  said,  sup. 

Where  only  three  or  four  words  are  to  be  represented  by 
the  consonant  stem  and  this  attached  circle,  there  will  be  no 
difficulty  in  making  the  outline  sufficiently  legible  for  report- 
ing purposes,  but  the  number  of  words  in  these  groups  is  in 
some  cases  ten,  twelve,  twenty,  and  even  thirty  or  forty  words. 
The  groops  containing  the  most  words,  are  p-s,  k-s,  m-s,  l-s, 
r-s,  s-p,  s-k,  s-n,  s-l,  <&c. 

2.  We  have,  for  instance,  a  group  of  forty  words  containing  l-s . 
All  of  these  words  are  perfectly  definite  as  written  in  the 
simple  style,  but  briefer  forms  are  desired  in  reporting,  es- 
pecially for  the  more  frequently  recurring  words.  The  re- 
porter can,  however,  make  no  greater  mistake  than  to  write 
all  the  words  in  such  groups  with  one  outline,  trusting  to  the 
context  for  the  meaning  of  a  sign  that  may  be  read  in  more 
than  twenty  ways.  In  Takigrafy  it  is  better 

a— To  write  all  proper  names  and  all  words  of  infrequent 
occurence  as  in  the  Sinple  Style. 

6 —  To  use  initial  vowels  where  they  occur. 

c—  To  use  the  circle  on  the  final  vowel  where  it  is  convenient. 

The  words  that  remain  will  not  generally  be  so  numerous  as 
to  impair  the  legibility. 


54 


THE  HAND-BOOK 


The  forty  words  of  the  l-s  group  mentioned  above  may  be 
disposed  of  as  follows  : 


KEY. 


1.  —  Alas,  ails,  allies,  alleys,  allays,  allows,  alloys,  alias, 

2.  —  Eels,  isles,  eyeless,  oils,  owls,  awls,  lazy,  lace,  lees. 

3.  —  Lease,  laws,  loss,  lows,    loose,  lose,  lies,  lice,  louse, 

4.  —  Else,  lass,  less,  lays,  Alice,  Elias,  Ellis,  Elsie, 

5.  —  Lacey,  Lizzie,  Lois,  Lewis,  Luce,  Lucy. 

Rem.  1—  While  the  forms  given  above  may  be  regarded  as  absolute,  to  be 
used  when  they  stand  alone,  some  of  them  may  be  abbreviated  in  cases 
where  a  given  word  occurs  with  great  frequency.  These  phrases  may  be 
made  more  or  less  definite  as  required. 

_>/    j^     y    j**    ->    -^ 

Laws  of  honor  laws  of  the  land  laws  of  God. 

Loss  of  honor  loss  of  the  land  loss  of  good. 

Illustration. 


X5         Na         NO 


OF  TAKIGRAFY. 


The  preceding  cut  gives  the  best  outlines  for  the  words  of 
several  groups.  Where  an  outline  is  used  for  more  than  one 
word,  the  additional  word  or  words,  as  given  in  the  following 
key,  are  enclosed  in  parentheses. 

KEY. 

(1.)— Apes  opes  pass  (ups  puss)  pace  (pussy  poesy)  pause  (paws  pose  posy) 
oppose  (compose)  peace  (piece  peas)  pays  pies  pious  poise. 

(2.)— Sap  (sup)  sip  sop  soup  soap  spy  spew  Esop  Ossipee  asp  ekes  aches, 

(3.)— Oaks  ox  ax  case  chaos  kiss  cause  accuse  keys  cooes  cows. 

(4.)— Sake  (sick  suck)  seek  soak  sock  ask  some  (sum  psalm)  seem  (seam) 
same  assume  mess  (miss  muss  ems)  mass  moose. 

(5.) — Moss  mace  (mussy  mossy)  maze  (mazy  maize)  mice  mouse  aims  amass 
(amaze)  alms  amuse  emus. 

(6.) — For  the  sake  of,  you  seem,  the  same,  we  seem,  (with  some),  we 
assume,  we  oppose,  keys  of  knowledge,  kiss  of  peace. 

Hem.  1— Many  words  containing  st,  are  written  with  the  halved  «  as 
taught  in  chapter  VI,  instead  of  the  circle  on  the  Te. 

Eem.  2— The  words  seem,  same,  sake,  and  some  others,  lose  the  vocal  sign  in 
phrases.  The  word  same  is  almost  always  preceded  by  the,  and  the  phrase- 
sign  the-same  is  always  used.  So  in  the  frequent  phrases  I  seem,  you  seem 
tliey  seem,  it  seems,  &c.,  the  vowel  is  not  written. 

4. — Words  containing  s  and  a  compound  of  the  I  or  r  series, 
are  more  easily  legible  then  those  containing  single  stems  : 
but  even  here  the  circle  cannot  be  used  without  some  restric- 
tion. Every  added  stroke  renders  the  outline  more  definite, 
until,  in  words  of  two,  three  or  more  syllables,  the  circle  can  be 
used  with  any  vowel,  except  in  special  cases  where  two  words 
are  liable  to  conflict :  yet  the  following  rule  must  be  observed 
even  in  long  words. 

RULE. 

The  long  sign  is  written 

(1.) — Where  s  is  preceded  by  a  vowel  in  the  beginning,  or 
followed  by  a  vowel  in  the  end  of  a  word. 

(2.) — Where  s  is  preceeded  by  two  vowels  or  a  diphthong. 

The  exceptions  are,  (a)  where  the  circle  is  written  in  the  vocal ; 
(6)  in  terminations  like  uous  in  contiguous  &c.  (c)  Special 
contractions. 


51 
o 


THE  HAND-BOOK 


^     S 

%>  ts*  %—  ?  y 

-N          ^> 


s. 


St. 


<^       ^ 


fe  ^     V—  ^^— 

^  /^—  c  i_ ,  r. 


<s 


\  ^—^r 


3— & 


i^ ^  «—  i.  Vw  n>  ^  ^. 


OF  TAKIGRAFY.  57 

WRITING  EXERCISE  4. 

Use  the  circle  in  the  following  words  : 

Bass  buss  boss  ebbs  abbs  abbies  abyss  blows  bless  bliss  apes 
opes  apiece  pass  pays  puss  pus  plays  please  press  sup  sap  spy 
spew  sups  saps  eggs  guess  goes  glass  grass  gloss  gross  agrees 
case  aches  ekes  sick  suck  sack  class  close  cress  cross. 

Adds  odds  odes  does  days  aids  dress  odors  its  'tis  (it  is) 
eats  oats  utters  tress  trace  eaves  views  save  salve  fuss 
office  frees  flows  offers  ashes  shoes  shows  ushers  assures. 

With  the  initial  circle  : —  cease  seize  says  siss  cess  season. 

With  the  final  circle  : — sows  asses  assess  eases  oasis  sees. 

Isis  this  these  oaths  others  mess  mass  muss  miss  ems 
aims  amiss  amass  alms  sum  some  owns  knows  nose  no's 
inns  sons  suns  seems  assigns  singi 

Ails  alas  awls  eels  ells  ills  isles  eyeless  allows  allays  oils  owls 
less  lass  else  sell  silly  sully  sally  airs  ears  errs  oars  race  rays 
ways  arise  yes  use  hie  has  hiss  house  whose  ages  edges  etches 
chase  chess  choose  chose. 

Specify  supper  submissive  succeed  success  satisfy  sudden 
situate  Saturday  seethe  sink  sunk  sank  seldom  selling 
recess  decency. 

Use  the  circle  but  not  the  signs  of  the  L  and  R  series  : 

Bourse  apples  palace  pales  peals  pierce  poles  polls  pills  pulls 
pulse  purse  applies  appeals  piles  pules  ghouls  cares  coals 
course  cures  curs  dares  dears  doles  doors  doers  tools  tires 
attires  tears  tares  fires  furs  fierce  fools  force  furies  varies 
shares  shores  shears  theirs  authors  feathers  fathers. 

Use  the  circle  on  the  vowel  in  the  following  words  : 

Buys  boys  boughs  bows  (ou)  bows  (o)  blues  peace  piece  peas 
pies  pews  poise  plies  pries  prize  spice  spies  spruce  sip  sop  soap 
soup  geese  goose  guise  grease  keys  cooes  cries  skies  sake 
seek  soak  sock. 

Dies  dice  dries  dews  dues  eyes  toys  tries  trice  thrice  sties 
trace  trays  strays  trees  strews  decays  destroys  vice  vies  flies 
fries  flees  fleas  flues  sighs  size  thighs  nice  mice  mouse  moose 
seem  same  Seine  assume  muse  assail  seal  lice  lies  loose  lose 


58  THE  HAND-BOOK 

loss  laws  lease  lees  rose  rows  rice  hoes  hose  hies  hues  hews 
choice  juice. 

Use  the  long  sign  and  omit  the  medial  vowel : 

Baize  bays  obeys  base  abase  abuse  busy  boozy  blaze  brays 
bruise  brews  pace  place  space  pose  oppose  prose  suppose  pause 
paws  posy  prosy  pussy  applause  supplies. 

Gaze  graze  glaze  gauze  glassy  glossy  greasy  clause  close  (z) 
close  (s)  cruise  crews  accrues  screws. 

Dace  dose  daisy  dizzy  dressy  drowsy  vase  phase  phrase  flays 
flaws  blues  suffice  suffuse  sues  those  thus. 

Mace  maize  maze  muse  amuse  mussy  massy  mossy  kuees 
neice  noisy  sawn  soon  sown  seeing  saying  sawing  sewing 
sueing  wooes  neighs  sail  soul  lace  lays  lazy  wise  woes  rouse 
arouse  areas  racy  houris  hazy. 

Use  the  long  sign  and  the  vocal : 

Bias  pious  spouse  spicy  plows  prows  grouse  kiss  echoes 
choice  scows  dose  dross  drossy  straws  souse  sows  sighing 
soil  louse  Alice  Elsie  Elias  Lacy  Luce  Lucy  Lewis  Lois 
Eliza  Royce  ruse  Jews  juicy  hussy  Hosea. 


WRITING  EXERCISE  5. 

Use  the  circle  in  these  words  : 

Observe  reserve  deserve  subserve  dissolve  resolve  reason 
baptism  Methodism  barbarism  supercede  gospel  expel  vas- 
cular. 

Use  the  circle  followed  by  Ze  or  Es  : 

Sassafras  hypothesis  thesis  theses  Caesar  society  access 
success  recess  decease  races  Cicero  scissors  season  season- 
able seasoning  voices  noises  vices  choices  spices  poises 
pieces  creases  processes. 

Use  the  long  Ze  or  Es  followed  by  the  circle  : 

Apotheosis  reposes  imposes  disposes  encloses  supposes 
faces  bases  paces  spaces  places  abases  gazes  grazes  kisses 
freezes  suffices  replaces. 

Use  the  circle  on  the  R  hook  side  of  the  straight  sign  : 
Spring  sprung  sprang  superfluous   suppress  supreme  succor 
scream    describe    disagree    express    strive    streak    stratify 


OF  TAKIGRAFY.  59 


strategy  sadder  sodder  restrain  prosper  prosperous  desid- 
eratum excresence  execrable. 

Use  the  long  Es  followed  by  a  sign  of  the  I  or  r  series: 

Supple  supply  sepulcher  cycle  sickle  sickly  suckle  ves- 
cicle  physical. 

Use  the  circle  but  not  the  hook  :  suffer  sulphur  silver 
sliver  slaver  sever  severe  southern  sapphire. 

Use  the  double  circle  : 

Necessity  necessary  ancestor  suspend  suspicious  sustain 
sustenance  senses  essences  excrescenses  glimpses  resuscitate 
progresses  retraces  presses  represses  analysis  analyses  Cisal- 
pine disgraces  synthesis  syntheses  successive  accessible. 

Use  the  long  sign  for  Ze  and  Es  : 

Zeal  zealot  zephyr  zany  zero  zinc  zone  Zion  zenith  zo- 
ology theism  deism  risen  rosin  rising  arising  arisen  em- 
blazon praising  pleasing  supposing  disposing  displeasing 
enclosing  disclosing  exposing  revising  refusing. 


As  some  tall  cliff  that  lifts  its  awful  form, 
Swells  from  the  vale,  and  midway  leaves  the  storm, 

Tho '  round  its  breast  the  rolling  clouds  are  spread, 
Eternal  sunshine  settles  on  its  head. 


Full  many  a  gem  of  purest  ray  serene, 
The  dark  unfathom'd  caves  of  ocean  bear, 

Full  many  a  flower  is  born  to  blush  unseen, 
And  waste  its  sweetness  on  the  desert  air. 


Days,  years,  months  and  ages,  shall  circle  away, 
And  still  the  vast  waters  above  thee  shall  roll ; 

Earth  loses  thy  pattern  forever  and  aye, 
O  sailor  boy !    sailor  boy  !    peace  to  thy  soul. 


CHAPTER  IV.    THE-£#  AND  Sir-  LOOPS. 


SEC.  32.    THE  St  LOOP. 

St  may  be  written  in  some  cases  by  a.  loop,  which  may  be 
both  initial  and  final.  It  is  written  on  the  circle  side  of  the 
straight  stems,  and  on  the  inside  of  the  curves.  Used  initially 
on  the  .R-hook  side  of  the  straight  stems,  it  implies  the  r  of 
the  .R-hook  series,  the  hook  being  omitted  ;  but  it  cannot  be 
used  on  the  signs  of  the  I  hook  series.  Used  finally  it  is  on 
the  right  and  upper  side  of  the  straight  stems,  and  can  be 
used  on  all  the  signs,  both  the  simple  and  compound  ;  as  in 
1.  The  Initial  Loop. 

fP\\        <\     <\      ~-     «=-      /     <^      << 


KEY. 

1.  —  St-b,  st-p,  st-g,  st-k,  st-gr,  8t-kr,  st-dr,  st-tr,  st-r,  st-r,  st-rl. 

2.  —  Strj,  strch,  stv,  stf,  stzh,  stsh,  stz,  sts,  at-the,   st-ith, 

st-tha,  st-tha. 

3.  —  St-ma,  st-mp,  st-em,  st-emp,  st-n,  st-ng,  st-la,  st-el,  stl-r. 

Examples. 

f     J  ^       /^ 


<r  -    r~  »r 

KEY. 
t  —  Step,  stub,  stag,  stagger,  stutter,  stir,  sturgeon,  starch, 

stairs,   sterile. 
2  —  Stem,  stump,  stamp,  sting,  stolid,  stillness. 

Rem.—  The  initial  loop  is  not  convenient  on  the  r-hook  side  of  Be  and  Pe, 
nor  on  the  upper  side  of  the  De  and  Te,  but  there  is  no  theoretical  objection 
to  using  them  in  these  cases,  if  any  one  wishes  to  do  so. 

60 


THE  HAND-BOOK.  61 

2.    The  Final  Loop. 

I'l    f    G    1    1  -Vf 


\       'j        9      °v        0         /«=>  n 

KEY. 
1- — Bst,  pst,  blst,  plst,  brst,  prst,   sprst,  spst,  gst,  erst,  cist, 

scrst. 
2. — Vst,  frst,  flst,  thrst,  qust,  mst,  nst,  1st,  rst,  wst,  yst,  hst. 

Examples.  \ 

Gn.  r^ 

u  V0 


KEY. 
1. — Blest,   prest,    suppressed,  drest,    trust,    classed,    crust, 

thrust,  quest. 
2. — Just,  chest,  tempest,  fullest,  behest,  molest,  wingest. 

SEC.  33.    THE  USE  OF  THE  LOOP. 

1. — It  will  be  observed  that  the  loop  represents  the  sound  st, 
written  Ste  :  hence  its  use  is  not  fonetically  necessary,  being 
a  mere  abbreviation,  used  for  convenience  and  for  greater 
brevity.  It  should  be  used  only  where  convenience  and  brev- 
ity require  it.  Theoretically,  it  may  be  used  on  all  simple 
letters  ;  but  the  loop  is  inconvenient  on  De  and  Te,  Bra  and 
Pra,  and  not  very  easily  made  on  En,  Ing,  and  some  others. 
Where  the  use  of  the  loop  is  inconvenient  Ste  should  be  used 
instead. 

Rem.— The  initial  loop  is  never  used  on  the  straight  signs  of  the  El  series 
of  compounds,  nor  on  the  si|?ns  Wa,  Ya,  Ha,  Ja  and  Cha.  It  cannot  be  used 
initially  on  any  curve  commencing  with  a  hook. 

SEC.  34.    THE  Sir  LOOP. 
1. — The  st  loop  is  enlarged  to  imply  the  addition  of  r,  as 

L  b  c-~      ^         J>        -P          ^          ^ 

Pest        pester     jest     jester       last      luster    classed    cluster 


62  THE  HAND-BOOK 


Rem.  1.  —  The  small  loop  is  one-third  the  length  of  the  letter  ;  and  the 
large  loop  two-thirds  its  length. 

Rem.  2.  —  The  sir  loop  is  not  used  initially  as  a  general  contraction. 

Rem.  3.  —  Observe  that  the  str  loop  is  used  to  indicate  the  addition  of  r 
after  an  st  loop,  not  to  indicate  the  use  of  str  in  all  cases  ;  and  the  following 
principles  should  be  carefully  studied. 

2.     Where  s  follows  the  loops  it  may  be  written  on  the 
opposite  side  of  the  stem,  as  in  the  examples  below  ;  but  where 
three  s's  occur,  the  long  sign  is  used  for  one  of  them. 
Examples. 


Casts      casters        forests       recesses    processes      successes 
3.     The  str  loop  may  be  used  on  the  Be,  and  be  followed  by 
Ka  in  obstruct  and  some  other  words. 

SEC.  35.    CIRCLES  AND  LOOPS. 

1.  —  The  use  of  the  circles  and  loops  are  governed  by  similar 
principles  ;  we  write  : 

•t>       b        k         b        r        <"        P         2         «7 
Pass  passes  past   pastor    muss    must    muster    frost    fullest 

a  —  The  circle  is  not  used  in  pace,  nor  the  loop  in  post, 
poster,  cloister,  <&e.,  where  a  long  vowel  or  diphthong  precedes 
the  s. 

b  —  Where  a  vowel  follows  st  or  str,  as  in  the  words  testy, 
pastry,  the  loops  cannot  be  used. 

Rem.  1.—  The  shortened  and  lengthened  Es  is  used  for  ft  and  str  in  some 
cases  where  the  loops  cannot  be  used. 


OF   TAKIGRAFY. 


63 


65. 


e//        V^_ji-       >^      <f 
y 


i_ 


!_, 


<=  -  ^) 


I 

k  - 


^^  —  -v      -r    O 


1' 


I 


1_ 


d_ 


64 THE  HAND-BOOK 

WRITING  EXERCISE  6. 

Use  the  Ste-loop  in  the  following  words  : 

Stub  stubbed  stab  stabbing  stabber  step  stepping  stepping- 
stone  step-child  stipulate  stipendiary  stag  stagnate  stagger 
staggering  stigma  stuck  stucco  stock  stock-jobber  stockade 
stocking  stutter. 

Stem  steam  steaming  steamer  steam-pipe  steam-car 
steamship  steam-vessel  steam-packet  steam-power  steamers 
stamp  enstamp  stamp-act  stamping  stamp-collector  stomach 
stomach-pump  stimulate  stimulus. 

Star  starry  starboard  starch  starched  stark  starlight  star- 
ling starter  startle  stereoscope  stereopticon  stereoscopic 
stereoscopist  stereotype  stereotyper  sterile  sterility  sterling 
stir  stirring  steer  steering  steersman  steerage  store  store- 
house stores  storage. 

Use  the  Est-loop  in  the  following  words  : 

Taxed  (taxt)  text  waxed  (waxt)  vexed  next  mixed  fixed 
hop'st  weep'st  wing'st  winced  bounced  renounced  lanced 
fenced  (fenst).  Worst  forced  enforced  endorsed  reversed 
discoursed  burst.  Best  bust  blest  guest  guessed  gust  dust 
test  jest  just.  Pressed  breast  crest  dressed  trust  thrust 
wishest  wisest.  Vest  west  rest  zest  hast  ripest  fullest  cool- 
est molest  suppressed  encrust  distrust.  Recast  repast  em- 
barrassed embossed  addressed  entrust  redressed.  Interest 
manifest  alterest  expressed  compressed  depressed  repressed 
ante-past.  Most  last  lost  least  uppermost  utmost  rest  erst 
cursed  forest. 


THE   Ster  LOOP. 

Pester  fester  faster  vaster  lustre  duster  pastor  castor  jes- 
ter muster  bluster  cluster  shyster  songster  fluster  rhymster 
teamster  sinister  Chester  Rochester  Dorchester  Manchester 
Minster  monster  impostor  Lancaster  plaster  forester  chorister. 

The  circle  after  a  loop,  &c. : 

Pests  pesters  casts  castors  dusters  festers  clusters  songsters 
monsters  punsters  teamsters  choristers.  Infests  molests 
r "casts  repasts  jests  jesters  suggests. 


or  TAKIGRAFY.  65 

GROUPS  OF  WORDS  ON  SINGLE  STEMS. 
Use  the  loop  in  these  words  :  |      But  not  in  these  : 


Best  bust  boast. 

Pest    past     hopest     apest 
suppest. 

Guest  gust  cased. 

Dust  test  taste. 

Vest  vast  fast  breast. 


Braced  prest  blest  placed.     pellucid 


Graced  crest  crust  crossed. 
Traced  trust  dressed. 
Frost  thrust  just  jest  chest. 
Fester  cluster  bluster. 


Beast  boost  based  abased 
biased  abused  bestow  beset, 

Pieced  paced  opposite  appo- 
site opposed  spaced  supposed. 

Ghost   goest    kissed   coast. 

Dosed  dowsed  testy  tasty 
teased  toast. 

Fist  feast  foist  faced  voiced. 

Bruised  prized  blessed  placid 


Greased  creased  cruised. 
Driest  truest   drawest. 
Freest        throwest         spiced 
cloister  blister. 


Amidst  the  storm  they  sang, 

And  the  stars  heard,  and  the  sea, 
And  the  sounding  aisles  of  the  dim  woods  rang 

To  the  anthem  of  the  free. 


Oft  did  the  harvest  to  their  sickle  yield, 
Their  furrow  oft  the  stubborn  glebe  has  broke, 

How  jocund  did  they  drive  their  team  afield. 

How  bowed  the  woods  beneath  their  sturdy  stroke. 


Can  storied  urn  or  animated  bust 

Back  to  its  mansion  call  the  fleeting  breath? 
Can  Honor's  voice  provoke  the  silent  dust? 

Or  Flattery  soothe  the  dull,  cold  ear  of  Death? 


O  stay  !  the  maiden  said,  and  rest 
Thy  weary  head  upon  this  breast ; 

A  tear  stood  in  his  bright  blue  eye, 
But  still  he  answered  with  a  sigh, 
Excelsior ! 


CHAPTER  V.  — THE  USE  OF  THE  FINAL  HOOKS. 


SEC.  36.    THE  7v-Hook. 

1.  —  A  small  final  hook  is  used  on  the  end  of  the  large  letters 
for  n.  This  Hook  is  made  on  the  left  and  under  side  of  the 
straight  signs,  and  on  the  inside  of  the  curves. 

Examples. 

J    c-O     _^    ^~*     5       5       ^>       ^ 

Ebon  weapon  hidden     rotten    heaven   often      then      men 


Non   melon     burn       turn       one        luncheon         agency 
2.  —  The  a-hook  of  the  Simple  Style  may  be  written  for  cm, 
and  the  i-hook  for  in  : 

Rem.  —  The  n  and  m-hooks  are  the  same.  The  aw-hook  is  written  on  the 
right  and  upper  side  of  the  straight  stems.  On  the  curves,  no  distinction  in 
the  hook  is  practicable  except  with  the  Ve,  Ef,  The  and  Tha. 

Examples. 

I     J      \»    ^    _=  JVC 


Pan,     pin,     gan,     kin,     tan,     tin,    fin,    fan,     shan,     sin. 
Thin,     than,     minute,     muslin,     ran,     win,     chin,     Jan. 

SEC.  37.    THE  USE  OF  THE  Ar-HooK. 

1.  —  The  n-hook  is  used  with  a  short  vowel  in  most  cases. 
Where  n  is  preceded  by  a  long  vowel  or  a  diphthong,  the  long 
sign  is  generally  used. 

2.  —  The  long  sign  is  also  used  in  all  cases  where  the  vowel 
follows  the  n  in  the  end  of  a  word. 

3.  —  The  An-hook  is  used  for  an  where  it  has  the  sound  of 
ang   in  such  words  as  bank,  drank  ;  and  the  n-hook  may  be 
used  for  in  in  such  words  as  brink,  drink,  &c. 

66 


_  THE  HAND-BOOK  _  67 

4.  —  When  the  circle  is  turned  on  the  n-hook  side  of  the 
straight  signs  it  implies  the  n,  but  the  circle  must  be  written 
in  the  cm-hook,  and  in  the  hooks  on  the  curves. 

Examples. 


Prince  prance  fence  France  wince  lance      bank    bone 

Rem.  —  The  small  hooks  are  not  generally  used  In  the  Contracted  style 
for  the  vocal  sign  alone  ;  but  they  may  be  used  in  some  cases,  without 
danger  of  confusion,  as  hi  the  words  practice,  back,  &c,  which  could  never 
be  confounded  with  prank,  bank.  So  also  tick  and  Dick  may  be  written 
with  the  i-hook  as  the  outlines  formed  could  stand  for  no  other  words. 

SEC.  38.    THE  Shon  HOOK. 

A  large  final  hook  may  be  used  for  the  termination  shn 
(spelled  tion,  sion,  tian,  dan,  &c.)  on  most  of  the  consonants. 

This  hook  is  written  on  the  right  and  upper  side  of  the 
staight  signs,  and  on  the  inside  of  the  curves. 

The  shon  hook  is  used  : 

1.  —  Where  no  vowel  precedes  the  terminations,  as  in  the 
words  tension,  deception. 

2.  —  Where  the  shn  is  preceded  by  the  short-vowels  a,  e  or  «, 
(o,   .   or  n),  as  in  the  words  passion,   discretion,  rendition, 
mission. 

Examples. 

A,  U         ^^Xi      ^)         P        O^=>     s^.9 

Ambition     passion    erection    revision     mission    ammunition    repulsion. 

Rem.—  Where  the  shn  is  preceded  by  the  long  vowels,  A,  0  or  V,  the 
vowel  is  written  as  an  affix,  aiid  the  shn  is  ommitted. 

b.  -  SPECIAL  USE  OF  THE  Shon  HOOK. 

1.  —  Where  the  letters  mp  precede  the  termination  shn,  as  in 
the  words  redemption,  the  p  is  dropped,  and  the  hook  is  writ- 
ten on  the  Em  or  Ma. 

2,  —  Ka  is  also  omitted,  when  preceded  by    Te  or  Ing,  as  in 
the  words  destruction,  sanction. 


68  _  THE  HAND-BOOK 

Examples, 


Redemption    assumption  destruction  instruction  distinction    addiction. 

3.  —  The  TO-  hook  is  used  for  ition,  after  De,  Te,  Dra,  Tra,  Ja 
and  Cha,  as  in  magician,  nutrition,  <&c. 

4.  —  An  tn-hook  is  also  used  after  the  circle,  as  in  position, 
physician,  and  after  an  n-hook,  as  in  mention. 

Examples. 

o  -  5  -OS—  =  r\  -  51  c^n  b  -  3  f*> 

Addition    nutrition  imposition    decision  transition   attention    mention. 

Rem.  1.—  The  large  hook  on  the  En  may  be  used  for  —  ntion,  where  it  is 
preferred. 

Rem.  2.—  It  will  be  noticed  that  in  decision,  given  above,  and  in  many 
other  cases,  the  hook  is  used  for  izhn,  instead  of  ishn. 

5.  —  The  circle  is  written  in  the  sTm-hook,    and    termina- 
tions ly,  ary,   &c.,  may  be  added  to  it.     In  some  cases,  how- 
ever, the   termination  tional  may  be  contracted  to  shl,   or 
omitted. 

Examples. 


3 


Traditions  traditional  passions  passional  traditionary  dictionary. 
Provisional  exceptional  intentional  proportional  electioneer  affectionate. 
6.  —  In  the  words  Ocean,  Prussian,  Grecian,  and  some  others, 
where  the  shn  is  a  radical  part  of  the  word,  the  hook  is  not 
used  ;  as  also  in  the  word  cession  and  its  derivatives.  These 
words  are  written  as  in  the  Simple  Style. 

SEC.  39.    THE  F-HooK. 

1.  —  On  the  left  and  under  side  of  the  straight  stems,  the 
large  hook  is  used  for  -v  and  /.  This  hook  is  used  where  the 
v  is  preceded  by  e-long,  and  i-  and  e-short,  and  in  some  cases 
with  other  vowels. 


OF  TAKIGRAFY.  69 


Examples. 


Brief      reprieve    grieve      retrieve      achieve      differ     serve 

2. — The  v  and /-hook  may  be  used  on  the  The  and  Qua. 

3. — The  v  is  written  in  full  after  the  circle.  Ively  after  the 
circle,  may  be  written  by  vel. 

4. — The  circle  may  be  written  in  the  u-hook,  and  the  termi- 
nations ly,  ty,  cfcc.,  may  be  added. 

Examples. 
"3 


Thief  equivocal  submissive  submissively  festivity  positively 

Rem.  —  The  following  Writing  exercises  designate  the  proper  use  of  the 
an,  en,  in,  f  and  c-hooks  in  many  words  in  common  use. 

SEC.  40.    THE  VOCAL  i  USED  FOR  In,  En,  On. 
The  vocal  i  (see  Prefix  In  Chapter  VIII)  may  be  used  for  in 
en  on,  both  medially  and  finally,  as  in  the  following  examples. 
(For  the  half-length  letters  used,  see  the  following  chapter.) 

Examples. 


Infinity  fasten  facinate  mason  Sampson  medicine  mercenary  listen  llstenine 


70 


THE  HAND-BOOK 


L- 


5. 


J    a.    IXs.       J 


c     rf-    X    I  . 


OF  TAKIGRAFY.  71 


WRITING  EXERCISE  7. 

Use  the  .Eft-hook  in  the  following  words  :  Bin  ben  bun  pin 
pen  pun  begin  again  hen  kin  ken  din  den  dun  tin  ten  tun 
gin  chin  win  wen  won  one  run  earn  ebon  robin  weapon 
akin  Eden  redden  rotten  sudden  done  undone  Latin  origin 
urchin  margin  welkin  born  burn  spurn  stern  well-born 
stubborn  stubbornly  stubbornness  steam-engine  leathern 
southern  London.  Fin  fen  fun  often  soften  seven  eleven 
ravine  thin  then  men  mean  meaning  amen  skin  spin  grin 
spun  stone  aspen  trodden  cabin. 

Prince  pins  pens  pence  tens  tense  clinics  currency  cousin 
mariner  foreigner  minute  mi-nute  minutely  eminence  dom- 
ineer dentifrice  tremendous  discriminate  determinate  pre- 
dominate calumniate  obstinate  patentee  trinity  plenipotence 
plenipotentiary  procrastinate  mendacious  Monday  mandarin. 

Uf-e  the  An-hook  in  the  following  words  : — Ban  pan  dan 
tan  rattan  fan  ran  than  clan  span  scan  plan  bran  stain 
sprain  explain  prance  pans  trance  spans  France  lance 
strains  sprains  explains  plantation  chandelier  shanty  maintain 
maintenance  planet  planetary  aggrandize. 

Use  the  En  and  An  hooks  before  Tc  in  : 

Bank  brink  pink  plank  prank  crank  clank  drink  drank 
frank  shrank  stank  stink  sink  wink  chink 

Use  the  vocal  hook  without  n  in :  Back  black  pack 
brackish  practice  Dick  tick  trick  chick  chicken  kip  gift. 

The  En  is  written  in  full  in  :  —  Bone  boon  bane  bean  paean 
pine  upon  pain  pane  cane  gain  cone  gone  dawn  dine  tine 
tune  bony  pony  tiny  downy  penny  puny  slimy  money. 

Shine  sheen  shone  thine  mine  main  moan  moon  noon 
nine  line  loon  lane  lean  lone  rain  roan  ruin  wean  wine 
Jane  June  china  ocean  can  gun  organ  wagon  reckon 
weaken  silken  slacken  shrunken  drunken  token  liken. 

WRITING  EXERCISE  8. 

Use  the  Shon  hook  in  the  following  words : —  Destitution 
restitution  prostitution  substitution  elocution  ascension 
recension  munition  admonition  proportion  prosecution 


72  THE  HAND-BOOK 

oppression  passion  ambition  volition  portion  apportion 
eviction  suppression  election  revision  supervision  vision 
prevision. 

Use  the  Shon  hook  omitting  the  Ka  :  Attraction  detraction 
destruction  dejection  ejection  injection  instruction  rejection 
direction  retraction  restriction. 

Use  the  In  hook  for  Ishn  in  these  words  :  Addition  attri- 
tion edition  logician  magician  rendition  tradition 
statistician  expedition  perdition  superstition  traditions 
traditional  additions  additional. 

Use  the  In  hook  for  Shn  after  the  circle  : —  Decision  pre- 
cision acquisition  requisition  position  imposition  physician 
excision  opposition  proposition  disposition. 

Use  the  In  hook  for  Shn  after  the  En  hook  :  Attention 
pretention  retention  prevention  mention. 

Use  Zhe  for  Zhn :  Cohesion  adhesion  erosion  corrosion 
explosion  deZ-usion  infusion  diffusion  suffusion  obtrusion 
detrusion  profusion  intrusion  der-ision  coZZ-usion  effusion 
affusion  allusion  elusion  illusion. 

Use  the  v-hook  in  these  words  :  Beef  peevish  deaf  brief 
reprieve  retreive  grieve  grief  heave  weave  bereave  drive 
driven  chief  achieve  mischievous  chieftain  restive  festive 
sensitive  laxative  positive  festivity  definitive  curve  serve 
service  revive  reverence  reference  raveling  strive  striven 
divergence  diversity  diversely  diversify  diversion  reversion 
divine  define  definition  definite  devise  devisable  divide 
dividend  divisor  defend  defense  defeat  diverge  illustrative 
destructive  authoritative  native  nativity  believe  deprive 
thief  thieve  thrive  equivocal  quiver  monograph  lithograph 
lithographic  lexicographic  authographic  hieroglyphic. 

After  the  circle  the  termination  ive  is  written  by  Ve : 

Aggressive  delusive  oppressive  impressive  progressive 
decisive  passive  possessive  receive  deceive. 

The  Ve  is  also  used  in  these  words  :  Brave  deprave  deprive 
grave  gave  groove  drove  drive  strive  supervise  puff  tough 
stuff  stave  gruff  trough  rough  grove  stove  wove  prove 
clove  drove  glove. 


CHAPTER  VI.  — SHORTENED  LETTERS. 


SEC.  41.    HALF  LENGTH  LETTERS. 

1.  —  All  the  large  letters  may  be  written  half  length,  to  im- 
ply the  sounds  of  d  and  t  :  —  the  light  letters  when  halved  im- 
plying t,  and  the  heavy  letters  d. 

2.  —  The  letters  m,  n,  I  and  r,  known  as  the  liquids,  imply  t 
when  shortened,  but  the  halved  letters  are  shaded  to  imply 
the  sound  of  d. 

Examples. 


^         •/        -  7  ^ 

Apt     act       aft      lagged  received  soothed  seized  thought  pate   straight. 
Attempt  aimed    ant      end        wilt      willed      art     aired      tart     paired. 

Rem.—  Students  should  observe,  that  only  these  four  letters  are  shaded  to 
imply  d.  This  principle  is  not  applied  to  any  of  the  other  letters,  though  in 
some  cases,  as  will  be  seen  in  the  next  section,  a  light  letter  is  used  to  im- 
ply a  d,  and  a  heavy  letter  to  imply  a  t,  contrary  to  the  rule. 

3.  —  The  half  length  is  used  when  a  vowel  intervenes  between 
the  halved  letter,  and  the  following  d  and  t.  In  this  case  any 
vowel  may  intervene  —  long,  short,  or  diphthongal  ;  but  the 
half  length  can  not  be  used,  when  the  d  or  t  belongs  to  an- 
other syllable.  The  half  length  may  be  used,  for  instance,  in 
pout,  but  not  in  poet. 

Examples. 


Bead  bowed  peat  pout  feet  vowed  white  right  greed  bride  sprite  threat 

73 


74  THE  HAND-BOOK 

SEC.  42.    THE  USE  OF  THE  HALF  LENGTH  LETTERS. 

1.  —  The  half  length  letters  are  used  quite  freely,  and  shorten 
the  outlines  of  thousands  of  words  ;  but  there  is  some  limita- 
tion to  their  use.  Though  De,  Te,Ja,  Cha,  may  be  shortened,  it 
is  frequently  quite  as  easy  to  lengthen  the  stroke  by  adding 
the  full  length  De  and  Te  as  to  shorten  it  to  imply  them. 

In  the  following  cases,  the  shortened  letters  cannot  be  used  : 

a.  Where  the  shortened  letter  does  not  make  a  distinct  an- 
gle with  the  letter  to  which  it  is  joined. 

b.  Where  a  vowel  follows  d  or  t  in  the  end  of  a  word. 

Examples. 


Dealt    lofty        arched        hardy        wretched        caged 
2.  —  In  words  of  one  syllable,  the  rule  limiting  the  use  of  the 
half  length,  to  cases  where  a  light  sign  implies  a  t  and  a  heavy 
sign  a  d,  should  be  generally  followed  ;  there  are,  however, 
some  exceptions. 

Exceptions. 


\  (         <^  f  I 

Could  should  would  had   but      that    great  called  toward. 

3.  —  There  are  some  other  cases  of  words  of  one  consonant 
stem  that  imply  a  t,  when  heavy,  in  which  a  connective  vowel 
is  used,  as  in  the  words,  gate,  bright.  Where  two  or  more 
consonant  stems  occur,  such  exceptions  are  more  frequent,  as 
in  the  words  forget,  arrogate,  habit,  &c. 

SEC.  43.    SHORTENED  STEMS  HAVING  FINAL  HOOKS. 

1.  —  Stems  ending  in  the  small  final  hooks,  may  be  shortened 
to  imply  d  and  t,  and  the  added  letter  is  read  after  the  hook. 
In  these  cases  more  freedom  is  allowed  in  implying  both  d  and 
t  by  light  letters,  and  vice  versa,  but  the  rule  should  never  be 
lost  sight  of,  as  its  violation  leads  in  many  cases,  to  illegible 
forms. 


OF  TAKIGRAFY.  75 

Examples. 


Bend  band  tent     taunt 
Bent  tend 

Opened  likened  attend  skinned  softened  thinned  sinned  went  grant  blent 
sickened  wind, wont  grand  blend 

2. — Stems  ending  in  the  large  hooks  are  not  shortened  with 
the  same  freedom,  as  those  ending  in  the  small  ones,  as  it  is 
not  so  easy  to  distinguish  differences  in  the  size  of  the  hooks  on 
the  shortened  stems  ;  such  forms  however,  are  sometimes  used. 

3. — In  some  cases  the  v-hook  after  the  shortened  Ka,  may 
be  read  last,  as  in  active. 

4. — The  termination  ance  is  added  in  a  similar  manner,  to 
the  halved  p,  as  in  the  words  acceptance,  reluctance. 

5. — The  termination  ity  is  added  to  the  v-hook  by  a  tick 
in  -  words  where  the  t  cannot  be  so  easily  added. 

6. — In  like  manner  a  tick  may  be  added  to  an  n-hook  to  im- 
ply a  following  vocal,  as  in  the  word  plenty,  in  the  examples 
below  : 


Impassioned    grieved         active  reluctance          plenty, 

apportioned        served         acceptance      receptivity. 


76 


THE  HAND-BOOK 


6. 


)x^      \     e   c 
S     ,  ^       a-ra^r 

—  u^     ,         ?      ~ 


,          , 


J 


ir 


\ 


1       ,^-\_  P 


*0 


?      c 


OF  TAKIGRAFY.  77 

WRITING  EXERCISE  9. 

Use  shortened  letters  with  connective  vocals  where  neces- 
sary : — Abode  about  abide  bead  bide  bowed  bait  bite  bid  bed 
bad  bud  but  beat  peat  pate  pout  pit  pet  put  pot  God  guide 
gad  good  get  got  coat  caught  kite  cute  kit  cat  cut  cot 
could.  Deed  died  date  taught  tight  apt  act  aft  eased  east. 

Viewed  vied  vowed  vote  feet  feat  fought  fight  fit  fat 
foot.  Sheet  shoat  shout  shut  shot  should  seat  sate  sought 
sight  suit  essayed  esteem.  That  thought.  Aimed  meat 
mate  mote  might  mute  mit  met  mat  made  mead.  Neat  naught 
note  night  knit  gnat  nut  not  end  and  (hand)  owned  aunt  ant. 

Lead  old  late  light  lute  lout  lit  let  lot  read  rate 
wrote  wrought  right  write  rout  writ  rat.  Wait  await 
wight  wit  wet  wot  would.  Heat  hate  hoot  height  hide. 
Chat  chit-chat  jade  jawed  chide  chid. 

Shortened  forms  with  initial  hooks  and  circle  : 

Bleed  blade  blued  bled  blood  breed  braid  broad  bride 
brewed  bred  blight  brought  bright  brute.  Played  plate 
plead  pleat  plied  plight  plowed  prayed  prate  pried  prude 
proud.  Glade  glowed  glide  glued  glad  greed  greet  grade 
great  gold.  Cloyed  cloud  called  clot  clout.  Trait  trite. 
Fleet  float  flight  flute  flout  flit  flat  freight  fraught 
fruit  fret  freed  fried.  Short  shirt  threat  throat.  Spite 
spout  spit  spat  spot  speed  spade  spied  supped  sapped 
soaked  sacked  scat  Scot  state  stout  stewed  sprite  sprout 
sprat  secret  screwed  street  strait  straight  strewed  smote 
smite  smit  smut  summit  seemed  assumed  slate  sleet  slat 
slight  slit  slot  slide  slid.  Assert  assort  insert  sweet  sweat 
swayed  send  sand  sunned  sinned  signed  sound  saint  sent 
sennight.  Wheat  white  whit  whet  what  wide  quote 
quite  quoit  quit  twit. 

Use  shortened  stems  with  connected  vocals  : 

Body  beauty  pity  pretty  party  purity  duty  verity  forty 
severity  mighty. 

Use  the  full-sized  letters  in  these  words : — Bowed  (bode) 
bawdy  beat  boot  body  boat  bout  abate  abet  abbot  bit  bet 
bat  payed  pawed  pied  pad  pod  petty  putty  piety.  Goad 


78  THE  HAND-BOOK 

goat  gout  gut  agate  keyed  cawed  cowed  kit  cud  cod. 
Did  dead  dote  doubt  doughty  duet  diet  ditty  debt  dot  toad 
tied  toyed  teat  toot.  Evade  void  feed  fade  food  feud  fed. 
Shade  shady  showed  shied  shed  shad  shod  shoot.  Assayed 
sowed  sawed  sighed. 
(Use  the  circle  in  seed  side  aside  said  sod  soot  sit  set  sat  sot.) 

Amid  mood  mode  need  gnawed  node  nude  annoyed 
naughty  knotty.  Lade  lady  lied  lewd  loud  load  led.  Raid 
rowed  ride  rude  rot  rut  root  weed  weighed  wooed 
wade  wed  wad  wood. 

Use  the  the  tick  for  h,  in  heed    head    ahead. 

Hoed    hied  hewed  chewed  cheat  jute  jet  jot. 

Blowed  bloody  brood  brad  bleat  bloat  blot  gloat  glut 
grate  groat  grit  grot  clad  clod.  Druid  dread  treed  trade 
tried  trod  treat  treaty  trout  trot.  Flayed  fled  flood  frayed 
afraid  fraud.  Shrewd  shred  throughout  thread.  Sped 
skid  scud  stout  steed  staid  stayed  stead  stood  strayed  stride 
astrayed  astute  sled  sold  senate.  Quiet  quota.  Tweed. 

WRITING  EXERCISE  10. 

Use  shortened  stems  ending  in  the  jE7n-hook  : 

Bend  bound  abound  pent  pant  pained  opened  (h)appened. 
Gained  Kent  cannot  county  kind.  Dent  dint  daunt  taunt 
tint  tent  tend  attend  pretend  vaunt  prevent  fount  shan't 
shunt  sinned  thinned  mount  meant  mint  amend  amount 
lent  rent  earned  went  want  wont  haunt  hint  gent  agent 
chaunt  acquaint. 

Blend  bland  blind  plant.  Imprint  brand  brunt  grand 
ground  grind  drained  trained.  Trent  front  friend  spent 
scant  second  sickened  skinned  stent  stint  stand  sprained 
screened  strand  squint.  Distant  constant  confront  com- 
plained complaint  constraint  confound  unbend. 

Words  containing  one  or  more  shortened  stems,  ending  in 
an  En-liook  with  other  letters  : 

Abundant  abandoned  pendency  blund(er)bus  accountant 
countenance  stipend  attendant  attending  attendance  ped- 
antry dentiform  dentistry.  Bending  blending  branding 
granting  granted  branded  stranded  wanted  contented 
intended  accidental. 


OF  TAKIGRAFY.  79 


Superabound  superabundant  superin(cum)bent  reluctant 
splendor  splinter.  Dependent  repentance  redundant  pre- 
venting repugnant  malignant  urgently  authentic  acquaint- 
ance retentive  merchandize  resplendent  quantity  occupant 
provident  despondent  respondent  substantive  verdant 
servant  mendicant.  Boundless  foundling  recount  redound 
elephant  eloquent  resident  resonant  attentive  coincident. 
Appendix  pendant  appendage  (Zhe)  hinder  hindrance. 

A  full  length  letter,  followed  by  a  shortened  En  : 

Bind  paint  plaint  pawned  pond  conned.  Deigned  dined 
donate  taint  toned  tuned  astound.  Feint  faint  font  signed 
mind.  Leaned  loaned  lined  lend  lint  lenient.  Rained 
round  wound  ruined  rend  weaned  waned  wind  wound. 

Hind  hound  joined  joint  jaunt  quaint.  Blonde  planed 
planned  planet.  Brained  grained  granite  grind  trend 
frowned  shrined  spanned  stained  strained  predominant. 

Miscellaneous  words  containing  shortened  stems  or  letters  : 

Portentous  sentiment  sentient  lamenting  emigrant  orna- 
ment adornment  assortment  arraignment  alignment  cormo- 
rant resentment  merchantman  recreant  evident  gormandize 
tenement  rubicund  prevalent  pertinent  permanent 
termigant  emergent  admittance  vindictive  sycophant  expo- 
nent dissolvent  supplicant  adjutant  coadjutant  coherent 
penitent  omnipotent  refrigerant  precipitant.  Correspond 
correspondent  correspondence  responding  despondency 
Pentateuch  pursuant. 

Written  with  full  length  signs  : 

Boned  Bennett  bonnet  bounty  pound  peanut  fantastic 
benignity  Gannet  count  vanity  sonnet  linnet  monotonous 
renewed  junta.  Browned  crowned  gradation  denominate 
ordinance  pendulum  penitence  penetrate  plenitude 
dignitary. 

The  /7i-hook,  tick,  termination,  ance,  &c., 

Divinity  tendency  receptivity  activity  plenty  plenteous 
affinity  profanity  acceptance  reluctance  curved  served 
observed  subserved  preserved  reserved  deserved.  Passion- 
ate proportionate  impassioned  proportioned. 


CHAPTER  VII.  — LENGTHENED  CURVES. 


SEC.  44.    DOUBLE  LENGTH  CURVES. 

1. — The  consonant  curves  are  made  twice  their  usual  length 
to  imply  the  addition  of  tr  or  dr  to  their  own  proper  sounds. 
This  contraction  applies  :  1st,  to  cases  in  which  the  tr  or  dr 
follows  the  lengthened  letter  without  an  intervening  vowel,  as 
in  the  words  after,  enter.  2d.  where  a  vowel  intervenes,  as  in 
fetter,  latter. 

Rem. — It  should  be  observed,  that  when  dr  and  tr  are  implied  by  the 
lengthened  curves,  there  can  be  no  vowel  sound  between  the  d  or  t  and  r. 
It  would  not  do,  for  instance,  to  use  the  double  length  in  entire,  much  less  in 
Ontario.  The  double  length  letter  is  not  used  where  a  vowel  follows  the  r 
in  the  end  of  a  word,  as  in  lottery,  but  when  another  consonant  is  added,  it 
may  be  used,  as  in  lateral. 

2. — Where  the  dr  and  tr  form  a  diphthong,  as  in  the  words 
entry,  sundry,  &c. ,  the  compounds  of  the  r  series  are  employed, 
though  some  long  words  form  exceptions,  as  eccentric,  intrinsic. 

3. — The  liquid  curves  En  and  El,  when  doubled  to  imply  dr, 
.are  made  heavy,  as  under,  elder  ;  but  Ma  is  not  shaded  except 
to  imply  emper,  ember,  emple,  emble. 

4. — A  heavy  letter  may  imply  a  tr  and  a  light  letter  a  dr  in 
some  cases  ;  as  in  the  words  voter,  shudder  ;  but  the  lengthened 
Ish  may  be  shaded  near  the  end  in  shudder  and  the  lengthened 
/  in  fodder  for  the  sake  of  greater  distinctness. 

5. — The  signs  Qua  and  Tiva,  are  lengthened  in  analogy  with 
the  other  curves,  as  in  equator,  twitter. 

6. — The  lengthened  curves  are  vocalized,  in  the  same  man- 
ner as  the  simple  letters,  but  the  vowels  which  follow,  are 
read  before  the  added  letters,  as  with  the  half  lengths. 

When  the  circle  is  added  to  a  lengthened  curve,  it  is  read  last 
of  all,  but  the  n  of  the  n-hook  may  be  read  before  the  implied 
dr  and  tr,  as  in  mentor,  reminder, 

80 


OF  TAKIGRAFY. 


81 


Examples. 


1  Enter         entry          sunder  sundry  sister  suitor. 

2.  After  shutter  litter  leader  bindery  shoulder  literal  equator  thunder. 

3.  Matters  mentor    reminder   latterly    flutter    slighter    matter    murder. 

4.  Twitters       posters       letters          binder          disastrous          disasters. 

7. — Emp  may  be  lengthened  when  written  up  wards  to  imply 
br  and  pr,  as  in  damper,  timber,  and  when  written  downwards 
to  imply  bl  and  pi,  as  in  temple,  tumble. 
Examples. 

7  r 

Damper  timber  temple  trample  December  resemble  assemble. 

SEC.  45.    LENGTHENED  UPSTROKES. 

Ra  and  Wa  may  be  made  twice  their  usual  length  to 
imply  tr,  as  in  writer,  water. 

Rem.  1.  The  JV-hook  is  not  used  with  the  lengthened  upstrokes  as  it  is 
with  lengthened  curves,  but  when  written  is  read  last,  as  in  warn,  sworn. 

Rem.  2.  In  winter,  hunter,  wonder,  the  half  length  followed  by  the  n-hook 
and  Ha  is  used. 

Resn.  3.  It  should  be  observed  that  the  lengthened  upstrokes  include  the 
r,  so  that  they  imply  tr  with  some  propriety.  The  other  straight  signs  Be 
Pe  Ga  Ka  De  Te,  do  not  include  r  when  lengthened,  and  so  cannot  properly 
imply  it. 

Examples. 

Writer     water     warn     horn      sworn     wonderful     hinder    hindrance. 


SEC.  46.      THE    DOUBLE  LENGTHS  ,    AND  OTHER  FORMS  OF 

CONTRACTIONS. 

In  many  cases  some  other  form  of  contraction  takes  the 
place  of  the  lengthened  curve. 


82  THE  HAND-BOOK 

1. —  The  large  loop  is  used  in  pester,  lustre,  bluster,  &c., 
instead  of  the  lengthened  Es. 

In  general  the  lengthened  s  is  used  in  cases  analagous  to 
those  in  which  the  halved  s  would  be  used.  Thus  we  have  Est 
in  coast ,  post ;  and  Ester  in  coaster  and  poster. 

2. —  In  muster,  duster,  jester  &c.,  we  have  the  large  loop  ; 
though  Ester  is  used  in  such  words  as  cloister,  Zoroaster, 
where  the  loop  could  not  be  employed  ;  and,  for  the  sake  of 
distinction  of  outlines,  in  the  words  foster,  blister  &c.  ;  distin- 
guishing them  from  fester  and  bluster. 

Rem.  1.  The  lengthened  curves  ending  in  the  rc-hook  form  exceptions  to 
the  general  rule,  as  a  lengthened  En  could  be  written  for  ndr  instead  of 
lengthening  the  preceding  letter.  So  also  a  halved  letter,  followed  by  Ra 
or  Ar  can  be  substituted  for  the  double  length. 

Rem.  2.  More  complete  directions  for  writing  words  in  which  a  differ- 
ence of  outline  is  possible,  are  given  in  the  writing  exercises. 

SEC.  47.    TREBLE  LENGTH  CURVES. 

1. — All  the  curves  except  Ing  may  be  made  three  times  their 
usual  length  to  imply  thr,  as  in  the  words  another,  neither. 

2. — The  letters  Fra  and  Ma  may  be  shaded  slightly  near  the 
end,  to  distinguish  them  more  fully  from  the  double  lengths, 
but  En  and  Es  can'be  sufficiently  distinguished  by  an  increased 
length. 

Rem.  Some  lengthened  curves  are  used  only  in  phrases. 

3. —  Ing  is  lengthened  to  imply  gr  in  such  words  as  anger, 
linger  &c.  ;  when  a  vowel  follows  the  gr  as  in  angry,  the  Qra 
must  be  used. 

4. — Ner  is  lengthened  to  imply  kr,  and  Nel  and  Ingl  to  imply 
kl  and  gl,  as  in  tinker,  uncle,  tingle. 

Examples. 


(1.)    Another  neither  anger  tinker 

(2.)    Tinkle  tingle  twinkle  strangle 


OF  TAKIGRAFY. 


SEC.  48.    TREBLE  LENGTH  Ra,  Wa,  Ha  AND  Wha. 

The  Ra  and  the  stem  of  the  Wa,  Wha  and  Ha  may  be  made 
three  times  the  usual  length,  and  shaded  near  the  end,  to  im- 
ply thr,  as  in  the  words  rather,  weather,  heather,  whither  &c. 

Examples. 


Rather  weather  (wither)  heather    whither    farther. 

2. — As  the  treble  length  curves  occupy  considerable  space 
the  upstrokes  may  be  commenced  one  length  below  the  line, 
and  the  down  strokes  a  little  higher  than  usual  so  as  to  bring 
the  outline  as  near  as  possible  to  a  central  position. 
Examples. 


Mother,  angle,  thither,    will  there  be,  farther  than,  on  the  oths-  hand. 


84 


THE  HAND-BOOK 


J     7. 


y  ^/  i 


v     t 


*~  >c 

c     ^      2         ?  y 


rv 


\  , 


c    V 


o» 

1 


\^ 


OF  TAKIGRAFY.  85 


WRITING  EXERCISE  11. 

Use  the  double  length  curves  : 

Provider  voter  sister  Easter  defaulter  defrauder  comforter 
fetter  fritter  shatter  shutter  shudder  suitor  cedar  cider  in- 
sulter  benefactor  malefactor  manufacture  compositor  visitor, 
depositor  center  eccentric  concentric  heliocentric  intr(in)sic. 
Shoulder  shelter  equator  quarter  squatter  quadrature  twit- 
ter interest  disaster.  Fitter  litter  letter  latter  fatter  fodder 
laughter  after  rafter  matter  meter  mutter  alter  filter  elder 
wilder  wilderness  under  tender  ponder  entertain  intersperse 
slaughter  slater  sunder  meander  render  defender  quadrangle. 
Flitter  sifter  falter  flatter  flutter  fritters  oysters  lighter 
loiter  murder  northern  dissenter  invader  innovator  elevator. 

EMBER  AND  EMPER. — Lumber  timber  September  November 
December  member  remember  amber  slumber  chamber  limber 
temper  temperance  temperament  distemper  damper  hamper 
crimper  pamper  scamper  whimper  bumper  jumper  thumper. 

EMBL  AND  EMPL. — Emblem  tremble  mumble  tumble  nimble 
thimble  gambol  jumble  amble  ample  trample  bramble  humble 
temple  dimple  rumple  crumple  grumble  rumble  fumble 
sample  dissemble  assemble  resemble  reassemble  preamble. 

Use  trebled  curves : — Another  neither  mother  father 
thither  further  blinker  canker  clinker  drinker  hanker  hun- 
ker hunger  rancor  spanker  thinker  tinker  winker.  Tinkle 
twinkle  crinkle  sprinkle  jingle  mingle  tingle  dangle 
strangle  bangle  wrangle  step-mother  step-father.  Anger 
languor  anchor  linger  drinker  periwinkle  finger  longer 
anthropology  misanthropy. 

Not  used  in  angle,  mangle,  tangle,  jangle. 

Use  trebled  strokes  in  rather  farther  weather  whither 
heather  hitherward. 

Lengthened  curves  ending  in  the  .Z?n-hook  : 

Vender  inventor  fainter  thunder  mentor  minter  fomenter 
tormenter  covenanter  lender  finder  cylinder  slender  slander 
Polander  Hollander  lavender  Hinder  remainder  islander 
germander  gerrymander  (ga)  salamander  yonder  mender. 

The  .E7n-hook  is  not  used  in  center  asunder  founder  flounder 
precentor  meander  monitor  &c. 


86  THE  HAND-BOOK 


Rear  on  high  the  scaffold  altar  ; 

All  the  world  will  turn  to  see 
How  a  man  has  dared  to  suffer 

That  his  brothers  may  be  free. 
Rear  it  on  some  hillside,  looking 

North  and  South  and  East  and  West, 
Where  the  wind  from  every  quarter 

Fresh  may  blow  upon  his  breast, 
And  the  sun  look  down  unshaded 

From  the  chill  December  sky, 
Glad  to  shine  upon  the  hero 

Who  for  Freedom  dares  to  die. 


Twinkle,  twinkle,  little  star, 

How  I  wonder  what  you  are, 

Up  above  the  world  so  high, 
Like  a  diamond  in  the  sky; 


Whither  ?  ah  !  whither  ? — Into  the  silent  land ; 
Clouds  in  the  evening  sky  more  swiftly  gather, 
And  ehatter'd  wrecks  lie  thicker  on  the  strand. 


Remember  now  thy  Creator  in  the  days  of  thy  youth,  while 
the  evil  days  come  not,  nor  f  he  years  draw  nigh  when  thou 
ahalt  say,  I  have  no  pleasure  in  them. 

A  soft  answer  turneth  away  wrath,  but  grievous  words  stir 
up  anger. 

For  whosoever  shall  do  the  will  of  my  father  which  is  in 
heaven,  the  same  is  my  brother,  and  sister,  and  mother. 

What  thou  knowest  not  now,  thou  shalt  know  hereafter. 

If  thine  enemy  hunger  feed  him,  and  if  he  thirst  give  him 
drink,  for  in  so  doing,  thou  shalt  heap  coals  of  fire  upon  his 
head. 

For  one  people  shall  be  stronger  than  the  other  people,  and 
the  elder  shall  serve  the  younger. 


CHAPTER  VIII.  PREFIXES 


SEC.  49.    SIMPLE  PREFIX  SIGNS. 
The  prefix  signs  most  commonly  employed  are  the  following  : 

)}       com,  con          *~-       extra-i-u  ^       magna-i 

cJ        self 
contra  fj        im,  in  ^       tranfl 

\*j       counter  ^          intra-i-o-u         ^      with 

1. — Con,  and  Com  are  represented  by  the  same  .signs :  — 
written  downward  in  the  direction  of  Ka,  and  upward  in  the 
direction  of  Ra.  These  signs  are  about  one-third  the  length 
of  the  full  sized  letters,  and  are  joined  in  the  outline. 

Examples. 


Console  consider  compress  comply  compose   concede    condemn  convey. 
2. —  The  first  sign  for  con  and  com  is  used  in  all  words  in 
which  these  prefixes  are  followed  by 


o  p       p          ov       cs.          o      o 

P     P       ^.     ^s  P       f1      ^       s~      <)         9 

3. —  The    second  form  struck  upward,  is  used   when  fol- 
lowed by 

4. —  The  following  words  deserve  special  mention  : 


Command  commit  commission  concomitant  uncommon  intercommunicate. 
Eem.  1.  In  some  words  con  and  com  are  not  prefixes  but  form  the  root  of 
the  word,  as  in  conical  from  cone,  and  comical  from  the  Latin  comiciu :  such 
words  should  be  written  in  full.  The  principal  words  of  this  class  are  coma, 
comb,  come,  comet,  comic,  comity,  con  and  conic. 

87 


THE  HAND-BOOK 


Rem.  2.  Words  in  which  com  is  followed  by  a  root  commencing  in  m,  drop 
the  m  of  the  root  in  most  cases  ;  thus  we  have  com-ence,  corn-union,  commune 
for  commence,  communion,  commune. 

Rem.  3.  The  word  connect  and  its  derivatives  also  lose  the  n  of  the  root, 
but  connive,  connatural,  and  other  words  in  which  con  is  followed  by  n  in 
the  root,  retain  the  second  n. 

Rem.  4.—  Con  may  be  frequently  omitted  before  De,  Te,  Ve  and  Ef,  and 
wherever  it  cannot  be  easily  joined 

SEC.  50.     Contra,   Counter,   Magna-i,   Self,   Trans,    With. 
These  prefixes  need  no  special  comment  ;  their  use  can  be 
learned  from  the  following 


Contradistinguished       counterfeit  countersign  magnanimous  magnificent 

counteract 
Selfish        self-educated     transgress     transact       withdraw       withstand. 

Rem.  1.    The  first  sign  for  counter  is  preferred  when  it  can  be  joined  in 
the  outline. 

Rem.  2.    In  trans  the  circle  is  written  on  either  side  of  the    Te,  as  in  the 
examples  transgress,  transact,  given  above. 

SEC.  51.    Extra-4-u,  Ex  AND  Exter  &c. 

1.  —  Extra  is  used  in  such  words  as    extra-professional, 
extrude  &c. 

2.  —  The  large  loop  is  used  initially  on  Ma  and  Ra  in  the 
words  exterminate,  extreme  and  their  derivatives. 

3.  —  Extern  and  Exter  are  written  with  the  St-loop  on  the 
Ma,  Ra,  and  Ar. 

4.  —  The  k  may  be  omitted    in  some  cases,  and  the  circle  in 
Expl  as  will  be  seen  in  the  following 

Examples. 


*       ^  V  X    V 

Extra-professional  extravagant    extricate  extrude  extreme    exterminate. 
Externality  extemporaneus  extension  extensively  expulsion  explicit  explore 


OF  TAKIGRAFY.  89 

SEC.  52.    Im,  In,  Intra-e-4-o-u  AND  Intrans. 

1.  —  The  prefix  Im  is  used  only  when  followed  by  m  in  the 
root,  as  in  immense. 

2.  —  When  Im  precedes  a  root  commencing  with  any  other 
letter  than  m  the  vowel  is  omitted,  and  Ma  is  written  for  the 

prefix. 

Examples. 


Immense  immaterial     impress     implied        impact    impartial  inimitable. 
Eem.    In  impartial,  imperishable,  and  some  other  words  the  Imp  may  be 
used  as  given  above. 

8.  —  The  prefix  in  is  used  whenever  convenient,  and  is  joined 
in  the  outline. 

Examples. 

7      7    V  «v 


Income  index  integral  inaugural  injure  insure  inbred  incurred. 
Infringe  influx  inauthentic  initial  inelegant  investigate  infest  incite. 

4.  —  This  prefix  cannot  be  used  before  the  letters 

and  the  compounds  of  the  Miook  series,  except  Gla,  Cla,  Fla, 
Zhel  and  SheL  "Where  the  prefix  is  inconvenient  the  letter 
En  is  written  instead.  In  some  cases,  however,  Ha  is  omitted, 
and  the  prefix  retained. 

Examples. 

v—  eX"^  ~~<  -  £>  *—  ^  <-£  "H 

Inweave          indwell  injudicious          initiate       insatiate    inhabit 

5.  —  The  circle  is  written  in  the  prefix,  but  when  in  is  fol- 
lowed by  sb  sp  sg  sk  sd  and  st  ,  the  circle  comes  on  the  .R-hook 
side,  which  form  is  also  used  with  the  trigraphs  Sera,  Stra  &c. 

Examples. 

Vl         f        *^1          ^  ^f 

V-       V-     ^      ^      !?      e  -     N 

Insufferable  insoluble  insurmountable  insist  insensible  inscribe  mstrument. 
Insubordinate  inspire  inspirit  insect  incidental  institute  insignificant. 


90 


THE  HAND-BOOK 


6. — The  prefix  Intra  is  formed  by  simply  omitting  the  r-hook. 
In  analogy  with  this  the  hook  of  the  trans  is  omitted  in  intrans. 

Examples. 


Intricate         intrepid         intransitive       introduce       intrude. 
7 — Mel  is  used  for  the  prefix  multi,  as  given  in  Chap.  3, 
Sec.  17. 

SEC.  53.    OTHER  PREFIXES  AND  PREFIX-SYLLABLES. 

I          1  i^        \>         ^         <\          ^        J          _o          -, 

Epi    pre       par       post       preter      super    subter    bene       dis         dent. 


per   para,  peri 
' 


dys 


Fare      an,  en       ant,  ent    enter          under 
fire, fore  un.on  ante,  anti    inter 


sine         centi 
syn         cent. 


Ultra       retro          water    wood       hydro       hypo  hyper  out. 

Pal       cal          tel       val       fal         ver        fer       ther          mer       ner. 
pol,  pul  col,  cul          vol,  vul  fol,  ful 

Examples. 


1.  Epigram    pre-eminent  permarv  t  paragraph  partial    perish  postpone. 

2.  Subterfuge      benefit      dentiform       farewell        fire-wood       forenoon. 

3.  Enlarge      antepast    antagonist     enterprise    interference    understand. 

4.  Nondescript      nonsense     sinecure     synonym     centigrade    centennial. 

5.  Ultramarine    retrograde    water-wheel    wood-bine      out-do       outrage. 

6.  Palpable    political    calculate    college  telegraph  valor    vulgar  fulcrum. 


\ 


OF  TAKIGBAFY. 


THE  PREFIX  Ad  BEFORE  V  AND  J. 

2.  —  Where  the  prefix  ad  is  followed  by  v  and  j  as  in  the  •words 
advise,  adjoin,  it  may  be  written  by  the  vocal  sign.  TJ^is 
prefix  is  used  in  the  words  adverb,  advocate,  advance,  adven- 
ture, adjudge,  adjoin,  adjunct,  adjust,  &c. 

Rem.—  For  the  prefix  syllables  ab  ac  ad  ag  <&c.,  see  page  101. 

SEC.  54.    COMPOUND  PREFIXES. 

The  prefixes  Com  and  Con  are  frequently  preceded  by  de, 
dis,  in,  mis,  re,  and  un,  as  in  decom,  discom,  incom,  &c.  In 
these  cases  the  prefixes  are  joined  in  the  outline  if  convenient: 
In  some  cases  however,  the  prefix  which  precedes  the  con  or 
com  may  be  joined  to  the  root  of  the  word,  and  in  a  few  cases 
may  be  written  over  it  disjoined,  and  the  con  or  com  omitted. 

Eem.  1.  The  prefixes  circum,  encum,  incum,  recum  may  be  written  with  a 
prefix  as  though  they  were  circom,  encom  &c. 

Rem.  3.    Eecog  may  be  written  by  the  Ba  in  recognize,  recognition  &c. 

Examples. 


(1)  Discompose  decompose  discomfort  discommode  encumber  incumbent. 

circumstance 
(2.)    Incompatible  incompressible  incongruous  inconstant  incontrovertible. 

incomplete  inconsiderable 

(3.)  Inconvertible  reconcile  uncontroverted  uncontradicted  unaccomplished. 

recommend 
(4.)  Recognize  misinform  accompany  accomodate  inconsistent  unmagnified. 


92 


THE  HAND-BOOK 


/I 5    /I 

I  t 


V    ^ 
L   J  . 


i  _  ^ 


4 


L. 


OF  TAKIGRAFY.  93 

WRITING  EXERCISE  12. 

In  the  following  words  use  the  shortened  Ka  for  con  and  com  : 

Comprise  compress  comprehend  complain  conclude  con- 
glomerate construct  conceive  contract  consecrate  consider 
conspicuous  consecutive  consequential  consult  considerable 
consummate  consist  conscious  conjure  (zhr)  conserve  con- 
trol ,  console  concise  concision  concession  committal 
conquest  conclave  concrete  congress  confront  converse 
conquer  comfort  comprehensive  compliance  compressible 
compromise  consulting  concentrative  concessive  conclusive 
conceal  consociate  consistent  concert  conciliate  conservative. 

Use  the  up-stroke  in :  Connecting  concurring  concord 
concave  concavity  converge  converse  conversing  convince 
convene  confine  confide  confound  confessing  confidant 
convex  convict  convention  convenience  concupisence 
confessor  concurrent  confirm. 

Combine  compose  compute  concede  conceding  constitute 
constabulary  comparative  compatible  compatriot  compound 
compensate  competent  component  comport. 

This  prefix  may  be  disjoined  before  De  and  Te  :  Condensing 
condign  conducting  condemn  continue  contaminate  contain. 

Omit  the  ra  and  n  in  the  root  after  the  prefix  :  Command 
commend  commemorate  commensurate  comment  commerce 
connecting  commingle  commission  commissioner  commode 
commodity  commodore  commune  common  communicate 
community. 

Write  the  m  and  n  in  the  root  after  the  prefix  :  Com- 
miserate commissary  commissariat  commigrate  commix 
commove  connate  connex  connatural  connive  connote 
connumeration  connubial. 

Immaculate  immortal  immaterial  immeasurable  immov- 
able immutable  innoxuous  innovate  innate  innutritious. 

With  full  length  Ka  :  Commute. 

Use  the  prefix  contra  contri :  Contradict  contradiction 
contradistinguish  contravene  contravention  contraband 
contract  contraposition  contraversion  contrary  contrariety 
contribute  contributive  contributor  contrive  contrivance 
contriver. 


94  THE  HAND-BOOK 

WRITING  EXERCISE  13 

Use  Ma  for  im  in :  Imbecile  imbitter  imbosom  imbue 
impair  impartial  impart  impassable  impeach  impel  imper- 
ceptible imperfect  impertinent  imperative  impious  impla- 
cable implant  implead  implicit  implore  imply  import 
impost  impressible  imprudent  impugn  impunity. 

Use  the  prefix  for  in  in  :  Inaccessible  inaccurate  inactive 
inadequate  inadmissible  inalienable  inalterable  inapplicable 
inappropriate  inarticulate  inaudible  inaugural  inauspicious 
inborn  inbreathe  inbred  incapable  incapacitate  incisive 
incline  inclose  income  incorporeal  incorrect  incrust  incredible 
increase  incredulous  incredulity  inculpate  incurable  indecent 
indebted  indefatigable  indelible  indefensible  indelicate 
indestructible  indicate  indictable  indiscriminate  indisposed 
indissoluble  indolent  induce  indwell  inebriate  ineffable 
inequality  inert  inertness  inestimable  inevitable  inexcusable 
inexpedient  inexpressible  inextinguishable  inextricable  in- 
fallible infamous  infatuate  infect  infer  inferior  inflame 
infest  inflict  influence  inform  infract  ingrate  inimitable 
iniquity  initial  innocence  innovate  innumerable  inoperative 
inordinate  inquire  inroad  inscribe  inscrutable  inseparable 
insolvency  insult  insure  insurmountable  intellect  intend 
intemperate  intimate  intimidate  intuitive  invalid  inventive 
invariable  investigate  invent  invincible  involuntary  invul- 
nerable incendiary  incense  instruct  inspect  insect  inspire 
inspirit  institute  insubordinate  instantaneous  incentive. 

The  En  is  used  in  the  words  incessant  insatiable  incest. 

MAGNA-I. — Magnify  magnificent  magnificence  magnitude 
magnanimous  magnanimity. 

SELF. — Self-denial  self-denying  self -admiring  self-conceit 
self-conscious  self-esteem  self-evident  self-interest  selfish 
selfishness  self-same  self-will. 

WITH. — Withdraw  withstand  withhold  within  without. 
Herewith  therewith  wherewithal. 

INTRA-I-O-U. — Introduce  intromit  introcession  intrinsic 
intrinsically  intrench  intrepid  intricacy  intrigue  introvert 
intrude  intrusive  intransitive  intransmissible  intransmutable. 

TRANS. — Transact       transatlantic      transcend      transcribe 


OF  TAKIGRAFY  95 


transcript   transept  transfer  transform  transfuse    transgress 

transitive  translate  translucent    transmigrate    transmissible 

transmit  transmute  transparent  transplant   transport  trans- 
pose transverse. 


WRITING  EXERCISE  14. 

1. — Write  ka  for  ex  in  :  Explain  expletive  explicate  explicit 
explode  exploit  explore  explosion. 

2 — Write  stra  for  extra  and  extri  in  :  Extradition  extract 
extrajudicial  extraneous  extricate  inextricable  extravagant 
extrude. 

3. — Use  the  loop  for  ex  in  :  Extemporize  extemporaneous 
external,  and  the  large  loop  for  exter  in  exterminate  extraor- 
dinary extreme. 

THE  PREFIX  SYLLABLES  epi,  non,  para,  post,  preter,  &c. 

Epidemic  epicure  epigram  pretermit  preternatural  preem- 
inent perish  partial  particle  paraphernalia  paradox  parallel 
paraphrase  paragraph  periwinkle  periwig  permanent  postal 
postofflce  pospaid  postpone  postage  superfluous  superstitious 
superstition  supererogation  superficial  superfluity  supervision 
superfine  superintend  superincumbent  supercede  supervene 
superabundant  supernatural  subterraneous  subterfuge. 

Benefactor  benevolent  benefaction  benefit  benefice  distort 
disjoin  dysentery  dyspepsia  dentiform  dentistry  farewell 
fire-wood  fire-place  fire-fly  fire-proof  forenoon  fore-castle 
fore-knowledge  fore-arm  forethought  animal  enlarge  endow 
unseen  anteater  antepast  antagonist  antidote  entrance 
entwine  enterprise  entertain  interference  interview  inter- 
pose interweave  understand  underrate  undergo. 

Nonexistence  nonresistance  nonpayment  nonperformance 
nondescript  nonsense  sinecure  synonym  synthesis  syncope 
syndicate  synod  synopsis  centigrade  centennial  ultramarine 
retrogression  retrocession  retroversion  retrograde  retrospect 
waterwheel  waterfall  watermelon  water-course  water-lily 
water-power  water-spout  water-cure  woodbine  woodman 
woodland  hydrogen  hydrostatics  hypochondriac  hypocrite 
hypothecate  hyperbola  outfit  outgo  outlaw  outlet  outline 
outnumber  outshine  outside  outdo  outrage  outward. 


96  THE  HAND-BOOK 


Palpable  political  calculate  calisthenics  kaleidoscope  collect 
culture  cultivate  telegraph  telephone  telegram  valor  volley 
voluble  vulgar  vulture  vortex  fallacy  folly  mermaid  energy 
nervous  fervid  thermal  thermometer  fulcrum  verdant 
multiply  multitude. 

COMPOUND  PREFIXES. 

Write  the  prefix  com  and  con  :  Accomplice  accomplish 
incombustible  encumber  incumber  discomfort  discommode 
discompose  disconcert  disconsolate  incommensurate  incom- 
mode incommodious  incommunicable  incommutable  incom- 
pact incomparable  incompatible  incompetent  incomplete 
incompliance  incomprehensible  incompressible  inconcealable 
inconclusive  incongenial  incongruous  inconsequent  incon- 
siderable inconsistent  inconsolable  inconspicuous  inconstant 
inconsumable  incontrovertible  inconvertible  incon  vincible 
incumbent  recommence  (re-downward)  recommend  recon- 
cile recondite  reconquer  reconsecrate  reconsider  reconstruct 
recontinue  reconvene  reconvert  reconvey. 

Uncomfortable  uncompromising  unconcerned  uncondi- 
tional unconformable  unconscionable  unconscious  uncon- 
trollable unconverted  uncontroverted  uncontradicted  unac- 
complished. Circumcision  circumference  circumflex  cir- 
cumfuse  circumspect  circumvent. 

Miscomfort  miscomprehend  misconception  misconceive 
misconduct  misconstruct  misconstrue  misinform.  Noncon- 
ductor nonconformity  noncontagious. 

Precompose  preconcert  preconstitute  noncombatant  non- 
commissioned noncornmital  noncompliance  nonconcurrence 
nonconformist  intercommunion  intercomparison. 

Omit  com,  con  and  cog  :  Accommodate  accompany  decom- 
pose (disjoin)  decompound  encompass  disconnect  discontent 
discontinue  inconceivable  incontestable  incontinent  incon- 
venient recognize  recompense  reconnoitre  «ncommon  (disjoin) 
uncommunicable  unconstitutional  circumlocution  circum- 
navigate circumcise  circumscribe  circumstance  preconceived 
preconformed. 

Miscellaneous  : — Umnagnified  unimagined  unintelligent 
uninterested  reinaugurate  reinsert  reinsure 


CHAPTER  IX. — AFFIX-SIGNS. 

Abbreviated  signs  are  provided  for  the  most  frequently  re- 
curring affixes.  Their  use  will  be  easily  understood  from  the 
following  table  and  examples. 

SEC.  55.    TABLE  OF  AFFIX-SIGNS. 
(          ship 


tionality 

ometer 

self 

lessuess 

with 

ward 

ure 

ual,  ural 

ually,  urally 

ular 


c 

ation 

- 

otion 

* 

ution 

^ 

bility 

J 

bleness 

I 

barity 

b 

pality 

^ 

ography 

x 

ocracy 

<SJ 

graph 

X 

graphic 

hood 

•  tude 

9 

soever 

L> 

j  fication 
|  faction 

•7 

fulhiess 

s> 


c/ 


J? 


ize 

uation 
ulation 
ology 


97 


98  THE  HAND-BOOK 


1.  Hesitation  emotion  restitution  debility  reasonableness  barbarity  disparity. 

2.  Municipality  geography    theocracy    telegraph    telegraphic    likelihood. 

3.  Infinitude  howsoever  helpfullness  partnership  constitutional  nationality. 

ratification 

4.  Thermometer  recklessness  therewith  reward  nature  natural  naturally. 

myself 

5.  Gradual  ocular  epitomize  secularize  graduation  congratulation  theology. 

SEC.  56.  THE  USE  OF  THE  AFFIXES. 

1.  —  The  affix  ation  may  follow  the  circle  or  a  loop. 

2.  —  The  hook  may  be  used  for  ution  as  in  constitution  ;  but 
the  vocal  sign  is  more  distinctive  and  should  be  used  in  most 
cases. 

Rem.  —  The  affixes  ation,  otion,  ution,  should  be  studied  in  connection  with 
the  «#A«-hook  explained  in  chapter  8. 

3.  —  The  terminations  em'on,  es?'on,  osion,  ttsion,  in  which  the 
s  has  the  sound  of  zhe,  are  written  by  the  use  of  that  letter  as 
in  the  following 

Examples. 


Persuasion    adhesion     erosion     allusion     compensation     incrustation. 
4.  —  In  analogy  with  the  signs  for  bility,  polity,  parity,  we 
have  the  following  : 

I    N,   N*    —   _   —.  _~    }    )     r 

Ferity   gality  garity  delity    telity    tality     tility     vility  verity  merity. 


Mility      nah'ty    nority    rality    rility      yality      charity       gility      jority 
Rem.  1.—  It  will  be  noticed  that  all  of  these  signs  may  be  reduced  to  one 
principle.    They  provide  for  omitting  the  syllables  ality,  elity,  ility,  arity,  and 
erity,  indicating  them  by  the  vowel  that  precedes  the  /. 


OF  TAKIGRAFY. 


99 


Rem.  2.— The  signs  forperity,  derity,  ferity,  verity,  merity,  and  dellty,  having 
no  attached  vocals  are  disjoined  if  necessary  to  legibility. 

Rem.  3. — Observe  that  the  full  vowel  is  used  for  ttity,  ality,  instead  of  the 
hook,  which  is  used  only  in  garity,  barity,  parity,  and  jmlity,  and  in  these  cases 
the  hook  is  made  long  and  narrow  to  distinguish  it  from  the  an  and  «An-hooks. 

Rem.  4.— Where  ility  and  ality  is  preceded  by  a  single  consonant  stem, 
and  followed  by  an  s,  it  is  better  to  write  the  word  in  full. 


L    L 


Prosperity  legality  vulgarity  fidelity  utility  fatality  dexterity. 
Servility  severity  humility  temerity  criminality  minority  morality. 
Virility  cordiality  charity  agility  majority  faculty  parity. 

5.  —  The  terminations  bleness  and  bility  may  add  the  hook 
where  it  is  more  convenient. 

(5.  —  The  vocal  sign  in  ography  and  ocracy  should  be  written 
upward  when  convenient,  but  it  can  be  written  downward 
when  necessary  as  in  geography,  or  omitted. 

7  —  The  two  signs  for  tional  are  used  according  to  convenience. 

8  —  Ward  is  written  with  a  full  length  wa  shaded  near  the  end. 

9.  —  Ometer,  ular,  ulation,  are  double  length  signs. 

10.  —  Ize  may  be  written  with  the  circle  where  the  Ze  is  not 
convenient  ;  but  the  long  sign  is  to  be  preferred. 

11.  —  The  circle  is  added  to  the  affixes  and  the  El  is  added 
for  ly,  or  the  ly  is  indicated  by  means  of  tfte  tick,  as  in  the  form 
ualy,  given  in  the  table. 

12.  —  The  double  circle  may  be  used  on  ya  for  iousness  in 
analogy  with  the  termination  lessness  ;  so  also  ciousness. 


Examples. 


Accountableness  optional  re  warder  righteousness  graciousness  amiability. 
familiarize 


100  THE  HAND-BOOK 

SEC.  57.    OTHER  AFFIX  SYLLABLES. 

Affixes  not  given  in  the  table  are  written  in  accordance 
with  the  general  principles  of  contractions,  or  in  full.  Such 
are  the  terminations  ate,  ble,  ed,  ing,  ly,  ment,  ous,  pie,  &c. 

1.  —  The  t  erinination  ed  is  frequently  omitted,  but  a  light 
dot  placed  at  the  end  of  the  outline  may  be  written  to  indi- 
date  it  when  necessary,  in  cases  where  De  cannot  be  joined 
in  the  outline. 

2.  a  The  termination  ing  is  easily  joined  in  most  cases,  and 
should  be  generally  used  ;  but  in  words  ending  in  kting,  like 
acting,  connecting,  &c.,  the  ing  may  be  indicated  by  a  tick 

b.  This  tick,  struck  upward  or  downward,  as  may  be  con- 
venient, may  also  be   used  after  the  ste  and  ster  loops,  in 
such  words  as  jesting,  casting,  trusting,  investing,  blustering, 
festering,  &c. 

c.  The  tick  for  -ing  may  be  used  wherever  it  is  more  con- 
venient than  the  Ing  ;  as  in  subsisting,  submitting,  after  the 
shortened  Es  and  Ma  ;  believing,  reprieving,  after  the  Fe-hook. 

Examples. 


Practicing  ticketing          infesting  ministering 

3.  —  The  termination  ful  may,  in  some  cases,  be  written  by 
Ef  as  in  useful  eventful. 

4.  —  The  El  is  written  for  ly  when  convenient,  though  it  may 
be  indicated  by  the  tick,  as  taught  in  the  preceding  section  : 
when  it  follows  a  word  ending  in  Z  it  may  be  omitted. 

Examples. 

o     ^     *.  —     U     £^,     ^y     -A     5? 

Printed  splendid  scented  being  amusingly  naturally  locally  incidentally 

5.  —  When  the  termination  ure  follows  s  it  is  frequently  writ- 
ten by  shra  or  zher.  as  in  fissure,  pleasure.    When  the  termi- 
nations iar,  ier  and  ure  follow  I  they  are  sufficiently  indicated 
by  the  shaded  El,  as  in  failure,  familiar,  collier. 

6.  —  The  terminations  ble,  and  pie  omit  the  le  when  it  cannot 
be  written  by  the  hook. 


OF   TAKIGRAFY.  101 

7.  —  The  terminations  ate,  er,  our,  ment,  mental,  mentality  , 
follow  general  principles. 


} 


Examples. 

*~        r-f 


\ 


Vicious    vitiate    fissure    measure    familiar    collier    sensible    municipal. 
Detriment  sentiment  ornamental  instrumentality  vigor  weaker  confessor. 

Rem.—  The  termination  Mentality  may  also  be  written  by  the  disjoined 
ment. 

SEC.  58.    REPEATED  LETTERS  IN  INITIAL  SYLLABLES. 

1.  —  In  such  words  as  abbreviate  and  approximate  the  db  and 
ap  may  be  omitted,  writing  -breviate,  -proximate.     So  ag  and 
ac,  ad  and  at,  where  followed  by  gr,  cr,  dr,  and  tr  may  be 
omitted,  as  in  :    Address,  attribute,  aggress,  accredit,  written 
-dress,  -tribute,  -gress,  -credit. 

2.  —  The  prefixes  ac,  a/,  and  ag  may,  in  like  manner,  be 
omitted,  in  some  cases,  before  cl,  fl,  and  gl,  as  in  acclimate, 
afflict,  ag-glutinate,  written  -climate,  -flict,  -glutinate. 

Rem.  1.—  The  number  of  words  containing  these  initial  syllables  is  small. 
Those  omitting  the  prefix  are  abbreviate,  appreciate,  appropriate,  approx- 
imate, aggrandize,  aggress,  agglomerate,  agglutinate,  acclimate,  accredit, 
accrue,  acclivity,  address,  attract,  attribute,  afflatus,  afflict,  affluence,  and 
their  derivatives. 

Rem.  2.—  In  a  few  cases  the  vocal  sign  is  written,  and  the  second  con- 
sonant omitted,  as  in  apprehensive. 

Rem.  3.—  In  some  cases  both  the  vocal  sign  and  the  following  consonant 
may  be  written. 

This  will  be  necessary  only  when  the  contracted  form  would  be  liable  to 
be  confounded  with  the  word  stripped  of  the  prefix,  and  in  the  case,  for  the 
most  part,  of  words  of  infrequent  occurence,  such  as  afflux,  appraise,  which 
might  be  confounded  with  flux  and  praise. 

Rem.  4.—  The  ac  is  omitted  oily  when  the  following  c  is  hard.  In  such 
words  as  accelerate,  accept,  accent,  ancient,  &c.,  the  Ka  must  be  written, 
though  the  vowel  may  be  omitted  in  many  cases. 

Rem.  5.—  The  use  of  double  letters  in  general,  is  taught  in  the  Manual, 
pp.  77  to  99.  The  treatment  of  the  doubled  m  and  n  with  the  prefixes  com. 
and  con,  im  and  in,  is  given  in  Chap.  VIII.  In  all  cases  not  specified,  it  will 
be  safe  to  omty  one  of  the  doubled  letters,  as  in  succor,  affect,  effect,  allot, 
illicit,  annex,  ennoble,  arrest,  error,  irritate,  assort,  essay. 


102 


THE  HAND-BOOK 


OF  TAKIGRAFY.  103 


WRITING  EXERCISE  15. 

Use  the  terminations  ation,  otion,  ution,  in  :  Nation  nations 
station  stations  ration  inflation  probation  perturbation 
dissipation  palpitation  degradation  gradation  condensation 
pulsation  incrustation  expectation  motion  emotion  potion 
devotion. 

Use  zJie  for  the  termination  asion,  esion,  osion,  usion  in : 
Abrasion  persuasion  evasion  invasion  adhesion  cohesion 
erosion  explosion  corrosion  allusion  effusion  confusion 
diffusion  infusion. 

Use  the  terminal  signs  for  bility,  polity,  parity,  perity,  &c. 
Ability  indivisibility  incomprehensibility  fallibility  prob- 
ability capability  sensibility  principality  municipality  bar- 
barity disparity  prosperity  frugality  legality  prodigality 
rascality  neutrality  vulgarity  fidelity  infidelity  dexterity 
posterity  brutality  fatality  futility  utility  versatility 
servility  polarity  severity  temerity  humility  criminality 
finality  minority  plurality  sterility  cordiality  charity  agility 
majority  regularity  jocularity  secularity  particularity. 

Written  in  full  in  :  Facility  docility  universality  sincerity 
parity  verity  civility  rarity. 

Use  the  terminations  given  in  the  table  in  :  Acceptableness 
reasonableness  formidableness  geography  stenography  biog- 
raphy chirography  neography  photography.  Takigraphy 
phonography  theocracy  democracy  aristocracy  stenographic 
takigraphic  phonographic  lexicographic  orthographic  auto- 
graph lithograph  calligraph  paragraph  photograph.  Manhood 
childhood  likelihood  womanhood  falsehood.  Magnitude  sim- 
ilitude fortitude  rectitude  gratitude  latitude.  Whosoever 
howsoever  whensoever  whomsoever  wheresoever  whatsoever 
gratification  ratification  edification  rectification  mortification 
faction  satisfaction  fiction  defection  perfection.  Fullness 
helpfulness  carefulness  artfulness  carelessness  helplessness 
artlessness  sinlessness  recklessness  graciousness  conscious- 
ness righteousness.  Friendship  authorship  courtship  worship 
hardship  ownership  partnership.  Thermometer  barometer 
chronometer.  Himself  herself  itself  ourselves  yourselves 
herewith  therewith  forthwith  wherewith. 


104  THE  HAND-BOOK 

Upward  onward  backward  reward  rewarder  rewarding 
structure  fixture  lecture  culture  cultured  sculptured  stature 
posture  discomfiture.  Actual  annual  manual  habitual  annu- 
ally gradually  spiritual  structural  agricultural  natural 
unnatural  naturally  ocular  secular  jocular  oracular  vernac- 
ular particular  regular.  Idealize  localize  individualize 
familiarize.  Infatuation  graduation  insinuation  situation 
population  stipulation  stimulation  modulation  congratu- 
lation regulation  granulation  geology  biology  philology 
apology  chronology  technology  physiology. 

Use  the  first  sign  tor  tional  in  :  National  rational  notional 
irrational  sensational  nationality  occasional. 

Use  the  second  sign  for  tional  in :  Emotional  exceptional 
provisional  professional  optional. 

Use  the  I  after  the  s/in-hook  in  :  Intentional  passional  tra- 
ditional additional  confessional  conventional. 

Other  terminations  written  in  accordance  with  general  prin- 
ciples :    Fragment  element  instrument  instrumental  instru- 
mentality detrimental    ancient    anciently   patient    patiently 
.  transient  accident  accidental  urgent  urgently  gentle  gently. 

Falsehood,  vulgarity,  recklessness  and  rascality  are  relics  of 
barbarism.  He  received  our  congratulations  with  immense 
satisfaction.  The  distinguished  lecturer  spoke  of  geology, 
geography  and  astronomy,  and  said  that  in  subsequent 
lectures  he  would  treat  of  biology  and  mesmerism. 

EDUCATION. — Education  means  the  development,  perfection 
and  proper  use  of  the  body  and  mind.  It  relates  to  the  train- 
ing and  guardianship  of  youth  from  infancy  to  mature  age  ; 
to  the  influencing  of  the  character,  not  only  of  individuals  but 
of  nations.  The  highest  powers  and  noblest  sentiments  of  our 
nature  might  remain  forever  dormant  were  they  not  developed 
and  matured  by  the  instruction  and  example  of  the  wise  and 
good.  In  a  still  wider  sense,  education  may  mean  the  whole 
training  of  the  thoughts  and  affections  by  inward  reflection 
and  outward  events  and  actions,  by  intercourse  with  men,  'by 
the  spirits  of  the  just  made  perfect,'  by  instruction  from  the 
word  of  God,  and  the  training  of  the  whole  man  for  life  and 
immortality- 


CHAPTER  X*  — PHRASE  SIGNS. 

SEC.  39.    GENERAL  DIRECTIONS  FOR  PHRASE  WRITING. 

The  general  principles  of  phrase  writing  are  the  same  in  the 
Contracted  as  in  the  Simple  Style,  for  which  see  Elements  of 
Takigrafy  pages  85  to  90.  The  following  points  should,  how- 
ever, be  noted. 

1. — The  phrases  should  be  short  ;  two  or  three  words  are 
sufficient  in  most  cases. 

2. — Join  words  only  when  they  are  united  in  sense. 

3. — Avoid  all  difficult  or  awkward  joinings. 

Rem.  1. — In  the  application  of  these  principles,  the  student  must  rely  upon 
the  tables  until  he  can  use  them  properly.  He  should  be  especially  careful 
not  to  use  a  long  phrase  unless  it  is  authorized  in  the  text  books. 

Rem.  2.— Words  may  be  regarded  as  united  in  sense  sufficiently  to  form 
a  phrase  if  they  follow  one  another  in  a  natural  manner ;  but  when  sepa- 
rated by  a  pause  of  any  kind,  even  a  rhetorical  pause,  they  cannot  be  joined. 

B. —         THE  CLASSIFICATION  OF  PHRASE-SIGNS. 

Phrase-signs  are  either  simple  or  contracted.  Simple  Phrase- 
signs  are  formed  by  joining  the  proper  outlines  of  the  words 
that  compose  them  without  change. 

Contracted  phrase-signs  are  formed  :  a — By  further  con- 
tracting some  of  the  words  of  which  they  are  composed. 
b. — By  omitting  some  of  the  words. 

Rem.  By  far  the  greater  number  of  phrase-signs  are  simple.  Contracted 
phrase-signs  should  not  be  constructed  at  random,  but  should  be  well  ma- 
tured and  used  with  uniformity. 

SEC.  60. — SIMPLE  PHRASES. 

Simple  phrases  may  be  formed  where  convenient,  by  joining 
articles  and  adjectives  to  nouns  ;  adverbs  to  the  words  which 
they  qualify  ;  pronouns,  prepositions,  conjunctions,  and  auxil- 
iary verbs  to  one  another,  and  to  words  which  follow  them 
generally. 

Rem.— The  following  tables  will  sufficiently  illustrate  the  use  of  phrases. 
But  their  number  may  be  indefinitely  increased,  subject,  however,  to  the 
limitations  as  to  length  and  convenience  previously  mentioned. 

105 


106 


THE  HAND-BOOK 


KEY  TO  TABLE  OF  Sniffs  PHRASE^TSIGN^S^ 

A   man 
A   boy 
A   child 

You   can 
You    could  *• 
You   have   been 

Where   are    you^ 
Where    were   you 
Where   will   you 

The   man 
The   men 
The    children 

You   are 
You   may 
You   must 

Much   more 
Much   easier 
Much   sooner    - 

Good   men 
Good   principles 
Good    wishes 

Your   own 
Your   number 
Your   name 

Too    much 
Too    soon 
Too    many 

Great    trials 
Great    measure 
Great   advantages 

They   will    be 
They   have 
They   would   be 

Very  good 
Very   much 
•     Very   many 

I    shall   be 
I  have   been 
I   cannot   do 

Who   can   be 
Who   will  go 
WTho   are   they 

All   times 
All   places 
All  the 

31  y   wish 
3!  y    name 
31  y    own 

Which   are 
Which   will 
Which  would 

Quite   easy 
Quite    sure 
Quite   likely 

Thy   vears 
Thv    life 
Thine   own 

Which   has 
Which    had 
Which   may 

So   easy 
So   sure 
So   soon 

He   has 
/  He   has   been 
He   had,   He   had  come 

What   could 
What  can 
What   would 

As   may   be 
As  .you 
As  'they 

He   did 
-    He   shall 
He    can 

That   time 
Tfeat   place 
That   purpose 

As   good   as 
As   great   as 
As  well  as 

His   own 
His   time 
His   name 

Are   you 
Are   they 
Are    we 

As   soon    as 
As   far   as 
As   fast   as 

She   will 
She    may   be 
She   has   not 

As   he 
Is   he  -' 
Was  he 

Only   one 
Only  this 
Only  that 

Her   own 
Her   parents 
Herself 

Were   we 
Were   you 
AVere    they 

How   soon 
How   far 
How   many 

It    may 
It  has 
It  should 

Have   I,   Have   you 
Have   been 
Have  not  been 

For  them 
For   whom 
From   me 

Its  value 
Irs   nature 
Its  own 

Will  be 
Will   not   be 
Will   have   been 

From   us 
Through   such 
Through   some 

We    shall   be 
we   have   been 
We  are 

I  shall  be 
I   shall   not   be 
He    shall   not  be 

Of  the 
Of   all 
Of   which 

Our  time 
Our  means 
-    (  >ur   own 

I   may   be 
I   may   have   been 
I  might  have  been 

In   the 
In   us 
In  some 

OF   TAKIGRAFY. 


107 


IX          r-~^n/     1 


I 

<r 


\J( 


rf         rf 


3 


'     I 


~9 


"  —  ^7 


\r 


108  THE  HAND-BOOK 

SEC.  61.  REGULARLY  CONTRACTED  PHRASES. 
All  the  contractions  employed  in  word-forms  may  be  ap- 
plied to  phrases  where  they  are  convenient  and  necessary. 
The  contractions  employed  in  phrases  are,  a — The  hook-signs, 
b — The  circle  and  double  circle,  c — Loops,  d — Final  hooks, 
e — Shortened  letters,  / — Lengthened  letters. 

Rem.  1. — The  examples  in  the  following  table  will  sufficiently  illustrate 
the  use  of  this  class  of  phrases.  The  student  should  not  seek  to  invent 
contracted  phrases.  Simple  phrases  are  preferred  where  they  can  be  used. 

KEY  TO  PHRASE-SIGNS  USING  THE  GENERAL  PRINCIPLES 
OF  CONTRACTION. 

1. — It  will,  we  will,  you  will,  he  will,  who  will,  you  will, 
when  is,  what  is,  where  is,  it  is.  2. — That  is,  which  is,  there 
is,  he  is,  who  is,  this  is  easy,  this  is  not,  it  is  as,  which  is  as. 

3. — As  true  as,  as  strong  as,  as  straight  as,  as  some  say,  as 
they  say,  let  us,  bring  us. 

4. — Thou  wast,  thou  hast,  thou  must,  thou  mightest,  thou 
must  be,  thou  canst,  thou  couldst,  thou  wishest,  thou  shouldst. 

5. — Thou  art,  thou  wert,  thou  wilt,  thou  shalt,  art  thou, 
wilt  thou,  wert  thou,  wast  thou,  wouldst  thou. 

6. — Canst  thou,  couldst  thou,  dost  thou,  didst  thou,  hast 
thou,  hadst  thou,  shalt  thou,  shouldst  thou. 

7. — Can  not,  could  not,  do  not,  did  not,  ought  not,  should 
not,  better  than,  sooner  than,  faster  than,  swifter  than, 
•y  8. — As  it  (is  it),  as  it  is,  as  it  was,  as  it  were,  as  it  will  be, 
of  it,  of  its,  if  it,  if  its,  if  it  was,  if  it  was  not,  while  it  is, 
while  it  was.  9. — For  there  is,  for  there  was,  if  there  is,  of 
their,  from  their,  though  there,  I  think  there  is,  through  their, 
may  there  be,  will  there  not,  while  there  is. 

10. — Is  there  (as  there),  as  there  is,  so  there  may  be,  on  their, 
doing  their. 

11. — What  if  it-should  appear-that  we  were-mistakeri-^ 
regard  to  this-entire-business  ?  12. — If  there  was-any  chance- 
of  error-we  should  have  been-better-pleased-if  it  had  been- 
previously-mentioned. 

13. — In  as  much  as,  as  soon  as.  as  long  as,  just  as  well  as, 
just  as  soon  as,  as  soon  as  possible. 

14. — Because  it  is,  because  it  was,  of  which  it  is,  in  which  it 
is,  of  which  it  may  be  said,  of  which  it  might  be  said,  by 
which  it  is  seen,  by  which  it  is  known.  15. — In  him,  in  whom, 
to  whom,  with  whom,  by  whom,  by  him,  by  them,  by  their 
own,  I  may  be,  we  may  be. 

16. — To  write,  to  read,  to  retain,  to  return,  we  are  ready,  we 
are  rather,  we  are  prepared. 


OF  TAKIGRAFY. 


109 


±  c_    ex  cy    c 

S,     T^VO       c    o       'T^       6 


_  D         r.O 
J> 


s  s  s 


110  THE  HAND-BOOK 

SEC.  62.    PHRASES  IRREGULARLY  CONTRACTED. 

In  phrases  irregularly  contracted,  some  of  the  "words  are 
either  omitted  or  contracted  in  an  unusual  manner.  The  words 
most  frequently  omitted  are :  the,  of,  of  the,  to,  to  the,  or, 
for,  a,  and,  all. 

KEY. 

1. — In  the  first  place,  in  the  second  place,  in  the  third  place, 
in  the  last  place,  for  the  purpose  of,  for  the  most  part,  one  of 
the  most,  one  of  the  best,  some  of  the  worst. 

2. — Laws  of  the  land,  will  of  the  people,  day  of  the  week, 
day  of  the  month,  time  of  the  year,  nature  of  the  subject,  one 
of  the  conditions,  the  advantages  of  the  system. 

3. — In  order  to  be,  in  relation  to,  in  respect  to  the,  in  regard 
to  that,  in  proportion  to,  with  reference  to,  from  day  to  day, 
from  hour  to  hour. 

4. — From  time  to  time,  from  place  to  place,  from  city  to 
city,  from  street  to  street,  from  mouth  to  mouth,  from  heart 
to  heart,  from  generation  to  generation. 

5. — In  consequence  of,  in  connection  with,  in  accordance 
with,  on  account  of,  on  one  account,  on  this  account,  on  no 
account. 

6. — On  their  account,  on  their  own  account,  on  another  ac- 
count, there  is  no  other  way. 

7. — One  or  two,  two  or  three,  three  or  four,  more  or  less, 
right  or  wrong,  sooner  or  later,  good  or  bad,  life  or  death. 

8. — By  and  by,  by  the  by,  forever  and  ever,  over  and  over, 
over  and  above,  through  and  through,  now  and  then,  hither 
and  thither,  high  and  low,  better  and  better. 

9. — For  a  moment,  in  a  word,  for  a  time,  on  the  one  hand, 
on  the  other  hand,  on  either  hand,  for  instance,  for  the  sake  of . 

10. — Next  week,  next  month,  next  time,  at  one  time,  at  no 
time,  at  any  time,  in  the  mean-time. 

11. — At  another  time,  at  first,  at  last,  at  least,  at  length,  at 
all  events,  at  once,  at  the  same  time,  it  seems  to  me,  it  seemed 
to  me. 

12. — I  have,  I  have  been,  I  am  (I  may),  he  may,  we  may, 
I  am  not,  I  incline  to  think,  I  am  inclined  to  think,  I  incline 
to  the  opinion,  I  much  prefer. 

13. — Aught  not,  aught  not  to  be,  aught  not  to  think,  point 
of  view,  almost  always,  most  likely,  most  always,  there  must 
always  be. 

14. — A  long  time,  fora  long  time,  for  so  long  a  time,  manner 
in  which,  it  will  not  be  said,  which  will,  which  will  not,  which 
will  never. 

15. — Out  of  the  way,  out  of  the  world,  one  of  them,  which 
of  them,  some  of  them,  neither  of  them,  any  of  them. 


OF  TAKIGRAFY. 


Ill 


i-^-v 


112  THE  HAND-BOOK 

MISCELLANEOUS  PHRASE-SIGNS. 

KEY  TO  OPPOSITE  PAGE. 

Who  art,  who  had,  who  hast,  who  hadst,  who  wast,  who  wilt,  such  as 
are,  such  as  can,  such  as  may,  as  sure,  as  short,  have  the,  at  the. 

Have  the  time,  at  the  time,  in  some,  in  the  same,  with  the  same, 
to  some,  to  the  same,  by  some  means,  by  the  same  means,  by  such  means. 

Be  not,  was  not,  it  was  not,  it  was  supposed,  it  was  said,  cast  upon, 
cast  away,  cast  down. 

Something  has  been  said,  seems  to  be,  out  and  out,  come  together, 
go  together;  near  together,  close  together,  together  with,  party  spirit. 

Arts  and  arms,  Eastern  continent,  North  America,  United  States  of 
America,  Eastern  States,  Western  States,  New  York  City,  Great  Britain. 

Mr.  Chairman,  Mr.  President,  Mr.  Speaker,  fellow  citizens,  ladies  and 
.gentlemen,  My  Dear  Sir,  Dear  Madam,  Dear  Sir. 

Your  favor,  your  honor,  yours  respectfully,  yours  truly,  yours  &o., 
truly  yours,  I  remain,  please  accept,  yours  very  truly. 

In  reply  to  yours,  I  wish  to  say  with  reference  to  this  matter,  I  fail  to 
see,  I  do  not  think,  he  did  not  think,  what  do  you  say. 

At  present,  at  the  present  time,  than  their  own,  less  than  their,  full  as 
well,  quite  as  well,  there  is  hardly,  as  follows,  at  the  rate  of,  at  this  rate. 

Signs  of  the  times,  if  it  is  convenient,  as  far  as  we  are  able  to  judge, 
have  they  any  right,  they  have  no  right,  in  order  to,  in  order  that  you  may. 

Peculiar  circumstances,  peculiar  circumstances  of  the  case,  generations 
to  come,  right  or  wrong,  rights  of  the  people,  laws  of  inheritance, 
last  will  and  testament. 

Just  and  honorable  views  of  the  Creator  of  the  universe,  Almighty 
God,  Lord  and  Savior,  Jesus  Christ,  Christ  Jesus,  in  heaven,  kingdom 
of  heaven. 

Telegraph  operator,  court  reporter,  circuit  court,  court  of  common 
pleas,  supreme  court,  superior  court,  court  of  general  sessions,  county 
commissioner,  notary  public. 

Social  intercourse,  social  etiquette,  good  society,  society  at  large, 
political  economy,  more  mature  consideration,  church  and  state. 

Bank  account,  business  address,  business  tact,  business  ability,  in  busi- 
ness life,  a  fortunate  venture,  on  change,  bill  of  exchange,  gold  certificate. 

Enclosed  we  (I)  hand  you,  we  are  in  receipt  of  your  favor,  enclosed 
please  find,  permit  me  to  congratulate  you,  please  reply  immediately, 
I  have  received  your  letter,  I  am  in  receipt  of  your  letter. 

Marriage  certificate,  mutual  service,  mutual  respect,  marital  obligations, 
marriage  portion,  bride  and  bridegroom. 


OF  TAKIGRAFY. 


113 


-r 


J 

w  • 


SV 


13. 


\\ 


f 


7 


V- 


114 


THE  HAND-BOOK 


\ 


L/ 


C  I 


2      f  y\ 

.         L>^^    •       —  '  N 


5     ^     e 


: 


"\y— 


O  6\ 


\ 


OF  TAKIGRAFY.  115 

WRITING  EXERCISE  16. 

The  phrases  are  separated  by  commas : 

A  great  many,  a  long  time,  a  long  way,  an  easy  task,  an 
ardent  desire,  all  the,  all  of,  all  of  the,  all  times,  all  places, 
all  processes,  all  ways,  all  worlds,  all  sciences,  all  sorts  of.  Are 
we,  are  you,  ase  they,  are  they  sure,  are  not,  are  not  sure, 
are  all.  As  well  as,  as  far  as,  as  great  as,  as  long  as,  as  much 
as,  as  soon  as,  as  soon  as  possible,  as  it,  as  this,  as  that,  as  we, 
as  you,  as  they,  as  it  is,  as  it  was,  as  it  were,  as  it  may  be,  as  it 
may  be  said,  as  there  is,  as  there  be,  as  if  it  were,  as  he,  as  he 
is,  as  he  was  sure.  At  it,  at  which,  at  any  time,  at  all  times, 
at  all  events,  at  no  time,  at  the  same  time,  at  some  time,  at 
once.  And  are  you,  and  is  this,  and  is  that,  and  shall  we, 
and  have  we,  and  do  they  suppose,  about  it,  about  us,  about 
time,  about  which.  Above  us,  above  them,  above  measure. 

Because  it  is,  because  of  this,  because  of  that,  because  of 

'  which,  by  chance,  by  some  means,  by  no  means,  by  all  means. 

Can  they,  can  we,  can  any  one,  can  you,  could  we,  could  they. 

Do  we,  do  you,  do  you  suppose,  do  you  mean,  do  you 
have,  do  you  desire,  do  you  know.  Did  you  know,  do  you 
believe,  do  you  think,  do  you  care,  do  they,  do  they  dare, 
do  they  expect.  Does  it  seem  possible,  does  this  appear.  Every 
person,  everything  else,  everyone,  every  where. 

For  this,  for  that,  for  us,  for  me.  for  my  part,  for  every  one, 
for  all  of  us,  for  many  persons,  for  the  purpose  of,  for  the 
most  part,  for  this  reason.  From  time  to  time,  from  us. 

Give  us,  give  them,  give  me.  Great  advantages,  great 
privations,  great  privileges,  great  measure,  great  men,  great 
trials,  great  many,  good  reason,  good  measure,  good  will, 
good  principles,  good  inclinations,  general  principles. 

He  is,  he  was,  he  has  been,  he  had  been,  he  shall  be,  he  will 
be,  he  may  be,  he  might  be,  he  can  be,  he  could  be,  he  will 
never,  he  will  need.  Had  he,  had  you,  had  there  been.  Hast 
thou,  hadst  thou.  How  much,  how  soon,  how  many,  how  far, 
how  are  you,  how  could  you,  how  can  we,  how  bright,  how  brief. 

I  believe,  I  can,  I  have,  I  had,  I  have  been,  I  have  seen, 
I  have  done,  I  will  be,  I  will  not,  I  am,  I  am  sure,  I  am  very 
sure,  I  believe,  I  hope  you  are,  I  hope  you  will,  I  may  as  well, 


116  THE  HAND-BOOK 

I  hope.  If  there  is,  if  it  is,  if  there  was,  if  it  was,  if  it  was 
not,  if  it  is  not,  if  it  were,  if  it  were  not,  if  there  is  not,  if 
there  is  to  be.  Is  it,  is  not,  is  it  not,  is  this,  is  that,  is  there, 
is  it  not  possible.  It  is,  it  was. 

In  me,  in  my,  in  many,  in  most  cases,  in  us,  in  any,  in  no, 
in  accordance  with,  in  account  with,  in  connection  with,  in 
consequence  of,  in  all  respects,  in  as  much  as,  in  my  opinion, 
in  reference  to,  in  regard  to,  in  relation  to,  in  respect  to  this, 
in  the  mean  time,  in  the  name  of,  in  the  first  place,  in  the 
next  place,  in  the  last  place,  in  the  second  plaee,  in  the  third 
place,  in  any  way,  in  the  way,  in  some  way,  in  the  same 
way,  in  no  way,  in  every  way.  It  is,  it  was,  it  will  be,  it 
would  be,  it  may  be,  it  has  been,  it  had  been,  it  is  necessary, 
it  is  unnecessary.  Just  so,  just  as. 

Let  us,  lend  us,  let  us  know,  let  no  one,  lead  them,  love  them, 
leave  them,  learn  to,  many  times,  many  ways,  many  days. 

May  I,  may  you,  may  they,  may  we,  may  not,  may  not  be. 
More  and  more,  more  easily,  more  securely,  more  certainly. 
Most  easily,  most  likely,  most  important.  Much  more,  much 
easier.  Must  be,  must  not  be,  must  not  have. 

WRITING  EXERCISE  17. 

Neither  of  them,  neither  of  us,  neither  of  which,  New  York 
City,  New  York  State.  No  one,  no  time,  no  measure,  no  such 
thing,  not  only,  not  any.  Of  all,  of  the,  of  their,  _pf  one,  of 
him,  of  his  own,  of  which  it  is,  of  which  it  is  said,  on  this,  on 
that,  on  which,  on  some,  on  any,  on  this  account,  on  that 
account,  on  his  account,  on  his  own  account,  on  no  account, 
in  any  account,  on  this  occasion,  on  the  other  hand,  on  either 
hand,  ought  not,  ought  not  to  think,  ought  not  to  have,  ought 
to  be  done,  over  and  over,  over  and  above.  Peculiar  circum- 
stances, point  of  view.  Quite  likely,  quite  sure,  quite  certain. 
Rather  be,  rather  have,  Reporting  Style.  Seems  to  be,  assumes 
to  be,  shall  be,  shall  have,  shall  not,  shall  not  be,  shall  not  have, 
should  be,  should  not  be,  should  have  been,  so  as  to  be,  so  as 
to  have,  so  there  is,  so  there  may  be,  so  on,  so  soon,  so  easy,  so 
far,  so  that  you  may,  some  one,  some  way,  some  may  suppose, 
something  certain,  something  more,  such  as,  such  as  are,  such 
as  can,  such  as  may  be,  such  a  man.  That  was,  that  which, 


OF  TAKIGRAFY.  117 


that  is,  that  is  not,  that  is  not  necessary,  that  it  was,  there  is, 
there  was,  there  may  be,  there  must  be,  there  is  no  objection, 
there  were,  they  were,  they  will,  they  may,  they  would  be. 

This  is,  this  is  not,  this  may  be,  this  time,  this  manner,  this 
means,  this  principle,  this  privilege,  this  practice,  those  times, 
those  places,  those  principles,  those  practices,  those  privileges. 

To  be  sure,  to  do,  to  bear,  to  wish,  to  some  extent,  to  which 
you  are,  the  other,  the  other  way,  the  other  day. 

Was  it,  was  this,  was  that,  we  are,  we  have  been,  we  may 
be,  we  shall  be,  we  can  be,  we  cannot  be,  we  could  not  be,  we 
shall  not  be,  we  shall  not  have,  we  were,  we  will,  we  wish, 
were  I,  were  you,  were  they,  were  there  not,  where  are  you, 
where  will  they,  where  shall  we,  what  is,  what  was,  what  will 
be,  what  can  be,  what  could  be.  When  we,  when  they,  when 
there  is,  when  they  were,  which  are,  which  may  be,  which 
cannot  be,  which  would  have  been,  which  you  could,  which  is 
not,  which  was  not,  which  will,  which  will  not,  while  there  is, 
while  it  is,  while  you  are,  who  are,  who  has,  who  hast,  who 
was,  who  would,  who  can,  who  could,  who  is,  who  was,  who 
were,  who  were  not,  who  will,  who  will  not,  who  may,  who 
may  not,  will  be,  will  there  be,  will  you,  will  they,  with  us, 
with  me,  with  no,  with  one,  with  many,  with  reference  to, 
with  respect  to,  with  regard  to,  with  which  it  is,  with  which 
we  are,  would  you,  would  he,  would  they,  would  there  be, 
would  become,  would  believe.  You  are,  you  would,  you  should, 
you  shall,  you  must,  you  can,  you  could,  you  will  be,  you  will 
have,  you  will  not,  you  may,  you  might. 

Omit  of  the :    The  day  of  the  week,  —  close  of  the  day, 

—  time  of  the  year,  —  meaning  of  the  word,  —  liberties  of  the 
people,  —  nations  of  the  earth,  —  advantages  of  the  system, 

—  condition  of  the  body,  —  faculties  of  the  mind. 

Omit  of:  Kingdom  of  heaven,  word  of  God,  loss  of  time. 

Omit  to :  I  wish  to  be,  I  want  to  go,  I  ought  to  be,  from  month 
to  month,  from  day  to  day,  it  seems  to  me,  it  appears  to  me. 

Omit  a  :  For  a  moment,  in  a  minute,  for  a  long  time,  after 
a  time,  once  a  month. 

Omit  and :  By  and  by,  over  and  over,  better  and  better, 
father  and  mother,  brother  and  sister. 

Omit  from :  From  hour  to  hour,  from  week  to  week. 


118  THE  HAND-BOOK 

WRITING  EXERCISE  18. 

Motion  of  the  Heavenly  Bodies ;  Thomas  Dick. 

Having  taken  a  cursory  view  of  the  magnitude  of  the  num- 
berless bodies  scattered  through  the  regions  of  space,  let  us 
now  consider  the  motions  which  are  incessantly  going  forward 
in  every  part  of  the  universe  :  for  all  the  myriads  of  globes 
and  systems  to  which  we  have  alluded  are  in  rapid  and  per- 
petual motion  ;  and  we  have  no  reason  to  believe  that  there  is 
a  single  quiescent  body  throughout  the  immensity  of  creation. 
We  have  here  planets  revolving  around  suns,  planets  revolving 
around  planets,  suns  performing  their  revolutions  around  suns, 
suns  revolving  around  the  centers  of  sidereal  systems,  and  in 
all  probability  every  system  of  creation  revolving  around  the 
center  and  Grand  Mover  of  the  whole.  The  rate  of  these  mo- 
tions, in  every  known  instance,  is  not  less  than  several  thou- 
sands of  miles  every  hour,  and  in  many  instances  thousands 
of  miles  in  a  minute.  The  fixed  stars — though  to  a  common 
observer  they  appear  exactly  in  the  same  position  with  regard 
to  each  other — are  found  in  some  instances  to  be  carried  for- 
ward with  motions  far  more  rapid  than  even  the  bodies  of  the 
planetary  system,  though  their  magnitude  is  immensely  super- 
ior. The  star  61  Cygni,  whose  apparent  motion  is  five  seconds 
annually,  is  so  distant  that  this  motion  is  equivalent  to  one 
hundred  and  seventy-seven  thousand  miles  an  hour.  Cassi- 
opeia moves  at  the  rate  of  two  thousand  one  hundred  and 
sixty  miles  every  minute.  These  are  motions  altogether  in- 
comprehensible, especially  when  we  take  into  consideration 
the  enormous  magnitude  of  the  stars,  some  of  which  may  be 
a  thousand  times  larger  than  all  the  planets  and  comets  be- 
longing to  our  system.  They  display  the  amazing  and  uncon- 
trollable energies  of  omnipotence,  and  afford  a  distinct  source 
of  admiration  and  astonishment  in  addition  to  all  the  other 
wonders  of  the  universe.  If,  then,  we  would  endeavor  to  obtain 
a  comprehensive  idea  of  the  motions  going  forward  through- 
out the  spaces  of  immensity,  we  must  not  only  conceive  of 
planets  revolving  around  luminous  centers,  but  of  suns  revolv- 
ing around  suns, — of  suns  and  systems  revolving  around  the 
centers  of  the  nebula?  to  which  they  respectively  belong, — of 
all  the  systems  and  nebulae  of  the  universe  revolving  in  immense 
circumferences  around  the  throne  of  the  Eternal,  the  great 
center  of  all  worlds  and  beings, — of  each  sun,  and  planet,  and 
system,  notwithstanding,  pursuing  a  course  of  its  own  in  diff- 
erent directions,  and  in  numerous  instances  acted  upon  by 
different  forces, — in  short,  of  the  ten  thousand  times  ten  thou- 
sand luminous  and  opaque  globes  of  every  rank  and  ordei 
within  the  circuit  of  creation,  all  performing  their  rapid  but 
harmonious  motions  throughout  every  region  of  space,  and 
without  intermission,  in  obedience  to  the  laws  of  their  Creator 


CHAPTER  XI.  — ANALOGY  AND  EUGRAPHY. 


Allusion  has  previously  been  made  to  certain  general  principles,  or  laws,* 
that  have  an  influence  upon  word-forms,  and  which,  running  through  the 
entire  field,  bind  them  together  into  one  system.  These  principles  may 
be  considered,  so  far  as  is  necessary  for  practical  purposes,  under  two 
general  divisions,  the  Laws  of  Analogy,  and  the  Laws  of  Engraphy . 

Analogy  consists  in  a  similarity  in  certain  respects  between  things  which 
are  in  other  respects  different.  When  applied  to  the  outlines  of  words  in 
Takigrafy,  analogy  consists  in  writing  such  portions  of  two  or  more  words 
as  are  alike  in  sound  in  the  same  manner,  and  such  portions  as  are  similar 
in  a  similar  manner. 

In  the  words  ingress,  egress,  digress,  congress,  regress,  transgress 
digressing,  for  example,  the  root  gress,  which  is  put  in  italics,  appears  with- 
out change.  The  law  of  analogy  is  observed  here  in  the  common  spelling  : 
but  if  the  first  word  was  spelled  ingress,  the  second  egres,  the  third  Aigreos, 
the  fourth  congroce,  and  so  on,  this  law  would  be  broken. 

In  Takigrafy,  this  principle  applies  to  all  classes  and  parts  of  words.  As 
the  same  sound  is  written  by  the  same  sign,  so  the  same  combination  of 
sounds  is  written  by  the  same  combination  of  signs. 

SEC.  63.    THE  LAWS  OF  ANALOGY. 

1. — Derivative  words  are  written  in  analogy  with  their 
primitives. 

Hem.— This  rule  applies  especially  to  the  derivative  word-signs,  and  to 
that  large  class  of  words  formed  by  means  of  the  addition  of  prefixes  and 
affixes.  These  derived  forms  are,  for  the  most  part,  regularly  formed.  A 
given  stem  remains  unchanged  throughout  the  entire  list  of  derivative 
forms,  and  even  the  prefix  and  affix  signs  have  some  analogy  to  the  signs 
from  which  they  are  derived.  The  word  form,  for  instance,  remains  un- 
changed throughout  a  list  of  over  a  hundred  derived  words. 

2. — Compound  words  are  written  in  analogy  both  with  the 
simple  words  from  which  they  are  formed,  and  with  other 
compounds  formed  by  uniting  any  of  their  parts. 

3. — In  all  classes  of  words  the  same  combination  of  letters 
are  written,  so  far  as  possible,  in  the  same  manner. 
*See  Chap.  Ill,  page  43,  and  Chap.  IV,  pages  53-65. 

119 


120  THE  HAND-BOOK 

Hem.  1. — The  third  rule  embraces  a  much  wider  field,  and  one  that  cannot 
be  dismissed  BO  summarily.  This  rule  applies  to  all  combinations  of  con- 
sonant sounds  that  are,  or  may  be,  written  by  means  of  distinctive  signs. 

a.  Compounds  of  the  L  and  R  series  come  under  this  law  ;  and  it  is  im- 
perative in  the  use  of  all  TRUE  INITIAL  COMPOUNDS  like  pi  in  play,  pr  in  pray, 
fr  in  free,  &c.    In  final  compounds  the  law  does  not  demand  the  use  of 
the  compound  sign,  so  its  use  here  is  merely  for  convenience. 

b.  The  law  of  analogy  demands  also  that  all  consonants  that  unite  with  a 
following  d  or  t,  as  in  the  words  apt,  act,  art,  and  &c.,  represent  such  union 
by  shortening  the  former  of  the  two  consonants ;  but  does  not  apply  to 
cases  in  which  a  vowel  precedes  the  d  or  t,  as  infeet,  mate,  &c. 

c.  The  lengthened  curves  present  another  instance  of  the  operation  of  this 
law  ;  but  it  applies  primarily  only  to  cases  in  which  a  curved  letter  is  fol- 
lowed by  the  sounds  of  tr  and  dr  without  an  intermediate  vowel,  as  in  the 
words  after,  enter,  under. 

Rem.  2.— There  is  a  conflict  to  the  application  of  this  law  to  the  half- 
lengths  and  the  double-lengths  ;  for  in  cases  where  ter  and  der  are  added  to 
a  curve  the  shortened  form  might  be  used,  though  not  with  the  same  degree 
of  appropriateness  as  the  lengthened  sign.  After  might  be  written  aft-er  and 
enter,  ent-er ;  but  the  true  syllabication  is  af-ter  and  en-ter,  which  determines 
the  mode  of  contraction.  Other  cases,  however,  occur  in  which  the  appli- 
cation of  the  true  principles  are  not  so  obvious,  as  wil  be  seen  in  the  use  of 
the  different  forms  for  st  and  sir,  &c. 

4. — The  operation  of  the  laws  of  analogy  may  be  traced 
throughout  the  entire  system  of  word  and  phrase-signs. 
Whether  a  given  principle  extends  through  a  larger  or  smaller 
class  of  words,  it  has  a  power  to  produce  uniformity  as  far  as 
its  influence  extends.  But  the  action  of  one  law  is  partially 
suspended  by  the  action  of  another  law  in  many  cases. 

The  termination  ward,  for  instance,  and  the  words  word  and  heard,  which 
express  the  rd  by  making  the  end  of  the  stems  Wa  and  Ha  heavy,  have 
usurped  so  much  territory  from  the  action  of  the  law  which  demands  the 
expression  of  rd  by  means  of  a  halved  Ar.  The  general  rule  could  be 
followed  in  these  cases,  but,  for  the  sake  of  briefer  and  more  convenient 
word-forms,  a  new  principle  is  introduced  which,  within  a  limited  sphere, 
over-rides  the  first  or  more  general  law. 

Other  examples  of  the  operation  of  law  within  a  limited  sphere  will  be 
noticed  by  the  student.  Tne  principles  have  been  already  detailed  in  con- 
nection with  the  rules  for  writing  in  previous  chapters. 

SEC.  64.    SYLLABICATION. 

1. — The  Laws  of  Analogy  apply  to  syllables.  Whether 
written  with  one  or  more  strokes,  the  same  syllable  should,  so 
far  as  convenient,  be  always  written  in  the  same  way. 


OF  TAKIGRAFT.  121 

Rem. — The  amalgamation  of  two  syllables  into  one  stroke  is  allowable  as 
a  means  of  contraction ;  and  convenience  requires  the  use  of  two  forms  for 
some  frequently  recurring  prefix  syllables,  as  for  instance,  col,  car,  pU,  per, 
&c.,  but  these  deviations  should  not  divert  the  student  from  the  general 
principles.  The  union  of  two  syllables  into  one  stroke  should  always  be 
regarded  as  irregular,  even  though  provided  for  in  the  rules  for  contraction. 
2. — Setting  aside  exceptions  which  occur,  every  syllable 
should  have  a  single  stroke  sign  to  represent  it,  as  in  :  co-rro- 
sive,  su-bli-mate,  pa-ra-gon,  Go-li-ath. 

The  principal  exceptions  are  :  a.  Where  two  strokes  are 
necessary,  as  in  the  first  syllables  of  6ar-bar-ic,  fur-be-low, 
a&-sent,  dar-kens.  6.  Where  a  word  is  shortened  by  the 
contraction  or  omission  of  one  or  more  syllables,  as  in  the 
middle  syllable  of  suc-ces-sive,  ac-cessi-ble  re-susci-tate  ;  the 
first  syllable  in  a-nal-o-gy,  profe-ssional,  pre-fig-ure  ;  and  the 
last  syllable  in  men-fa'on,,  ver-nac-wZar ;  and  in  words  gener- 
ally written  with  prefix  and  affix  signs  which  represent  more 
than  one  syllable. 

Rem.  1. — It  will  be  observed  that  in  dividing  the  words  into  syllables  the 
ordinary  rules  of  syllabication  are  not  always  followed. 

Rem.  2. — Though  the  common  laws  of  syllabication  are  not  strictly  fol- 
lowed, yet  it  is  better,  when  equally  convenient,  to  divide  a  word  by  using 
those  forms  of  contraction  which  preserve  the  syllables  in  the  most  natural 
form.  It  is  better  to  write  ar-dent,  than  ard-ent ;  ev-(i)-dent  than  evid-ent  : 
though  ind-(i)-vid  is  written  for  individual,  and  many  other  words  are 
specially  contracted  contrary  to  this  principle.  An  application  of  this  rule 
will  however,  indicate  the  proper  outline  of  the  word  in  many  cases. 
It  will  explain,  for  instance,  why  we  use  the  rd  in  earl,  furl,  &c.,  but  not 
in  early,  fairly,  Ac.  Final  syllables  except  when  compounded  with  the  pre- 
vious syllable  in  an  affix  sign  should  be  written  with  a  separate  stroke,  as 
ly  in  regularly,  rarely,  &c. 

SEC.  65.    EUGEAPHY. 

1. — The  term  Eugraphy,  from  the  Greek,  eu,  good  or  well,  and 
graphe,  writing,  is  used  to  designate  that  quality  in  the  writ- 
ing of  Tachygraphy  which  gives  to  it  grace  and  flexibility.  It 
should  not  be  confounded  with  the  term  caligraphy,  which 
means  beautiful  writing,  for  eugraphy  means,  not  beautiful 
writing,  but  the  beauty  or  gracefulness  of  the  writing. 

2. — The  principles  of  eugraphy  apply  to  the  LETTERS,  the 
WORD-FORMS,  and  the  PHRASE-SIGNS. 

As  applied  to  the  letters,  grace  of  form  is  secured  by  accuracy 
in  direction,  proportion,  curvature,  and  shading. 


122  THE  HAND-BOOK 

a.  Inclined,  full-sized  letters  should  be  so  proportioned  in 
length  as  to  fill  the  same  space  perpendicularly  as  the  upright 
letters. 

6.  The  same  principle  will  apply  to  the  half-length,  double, 
and  treble-length  characters.  They  each  will  fill  one-half  a 
space,  or  two  or  three  spaces,  as  the  case  may  be. 

Hem.  —  An  earnest  effort  on  the  part  of  the  writer  to  accustom  himself  to 
accuracy  in  this  respect  will  be  rewarded  by  an  increased  beauty  in  the 
writing.  He  should  practice  on  each  letter,  contrasting  its  half-length,  full 
and  double-length  forms  with  one  another  until  he  gains  skill  in  making 
suitable  distinctions. 

3.  —  The  proper  size  of  the  letters  for  note-taking  is  one- 
eighth  of  an  inch  for  Be  and  Pe  as  the  standard  for  the  space 
occupied.  The  Ga,  Ka,  The,  El,  &c.  will  be  a  little  longer,  and 
Ra,  Wa  and  Ha,  a  little  longer  still  than  Ga,  Ka. 

Examples. 
ll\\))  (         (        ^    ^        ^      V 


Rem.  —  In  making  the  standard  of  size,  one-eighth  of  an  inch,  it  is  not  de- 
signed to  urge  this  size  upon  all.  Many  persons  will  prefer  to  write  larger 
characters  for  the  sake  of  greater  distinctness.  Characters  may  be  made 
of  any  size  without  interfering  with  the  principles  of  eugraphy,  provided 
the  proper  proportions  are  maintained.  Yet,  greater  rapidity  of  writing 
can  be  secured  in  the  use  of  small  letters  than  larger  ones. 

4.  —  As  applied  to  words  and  phrases,  the  principles  of  eu- 
graphy determine  the  comparative  convenience  of  different 
outlines.  Good  outlines  are  those  best  adapted  to  speed  and 
legibility  :  hence,  the  laws  of  eugraphy  have  reference,  first, 

tO  THE  REQUIREMENTS  OF  SPEED,  and  Second,  to  THE  REQUIRE- 
MENTS OF  LEGIBILITY.  These  requirements  coincide  in  some 
particulars,  but  not  in  all. 

SEC.  66.    THE  REQUIREMENTS  OF  SPEED. 

1.  —  The  requirements  of  speed  are  based  on  the  laws  of  mo- 
tion, and  relate  to  the  BREVITY,  FACILENESS,  and  LINEALITY  of 
the  outlines. 

Rem.  —  Some  outlines  may  be  written  much  more  easily  than  others  which 
contain  the  same  number  of  strokes.  Hence  it  is  the  province  of  the  laws 
of  eugraphy  to  point  out  the  conditions  under  which  the  most  facile  outlines 
may  be  produced. 


OF  TAKIGRAFI.  123 


2. — The  brevity  of  the  outline  will  be  determined  generally 
by  the  principles  of  contraction.  Yet  some  discretion  may  be 
used  as  to  whether  to  employ  a  longer  or  shorter  form  for  a 
word  or  phrase.  Where  brevity  can  be  secured  without  sac- 
rificing too  much  to  obtain  it,  it  is  desirable  ;  but  the  student 
should  be  cautioned  against  an  undue  regard  for  brief  forms 
which  are  gained  by  a  loss  of  flexibility  or  legibility. 

Rem. — All  contractions  demanded  by  the  laws  of  analogy  should  be 
employed  :  those  not  demanded,  but  only  permitted,  should  be  submitted 
to  the  limitation  of  the  other  principles  which  enter  into  the  formation  of 
good  word-forms. 

3. — The  facileness  of    an  outline  depends    upon.     a.   THE 

NATURE  OF  THE  ANGLES  MADE  IN  JOINING  ITS  LETTERS,  b.  THE 
HOMOGENEOUSNESS  OF  THE  CURVES  THAT  UNITE.  C.  THE  READ- 
INESS WITH  WHICH  THE  WORD-FORMS  MAY  BE  JOINED  INTO 
PHRASES. 

SEC.  67.    THE  NATURE  OF  THE  ANGLES. 

1. — When  the  hand  is  in  rapid  motion,  any  change  of  direc- 
tion hinders  the  speed  of  the  writer.  If  the  first  stroke  glides 
into  the  second  without  an  angle,  the  highest  rate  of  speed 
can.be  secured. 

2. — When  an  angle  must  be  formed,  the  more  acute  it  is  the 
more  easily  it  can  be  made. 

Rem.— For  illustration  of  the  angles,  right,  acute  and  obtuse,  and  facing 
and  opposing  curves,  see  pp.  16  and.  17. 

3.-Obtuse  angles  are  relieved  :  a.  By  use  of  half-length  signs. 
b.  By  skillful  use  of  the  variable  signs,  c.  By  the  insertion 
of  vocal  signs  where  it  is  convenient,  as  in  bog,  bag,  dog,  dock. 

SEC.  68.    THE  HOMOGENEOUSNESS  OF  THE  CURVES. 

1. — Curves  are  homogeneous  when  they  face  the  same  way, 
or  form  any  portion  of  a  circle  that  may  be  made  by  tracing 
the  circle  in  the  same  direction.  Opposing  curves  are  made 
by  tracing  the  circle  in  opposite  directions 

Rem.— The  curves  Ma,  Es,  Ith,  Ef  and  El,  are  homogeneous ;  so  are  the 
curves  Tha,  La,  Ish  and  En  ;  but  the  curves  in  the  first  example  are,  each 
and  all,  opposed  to  the  curves  in  the  second  example 


124  THE  HAND-BOOK 

2. — When  an  angle  occurs  between  them,  facing  curves  are 
made  much  more  easily  than  opposing  curves  ;  for  the  pen  traces 
a  second  curve  in  the  same  direction  without  an  entire  loss  of 
motion  ;  and  when  an  opposing  curve  is  made,  the  direction 
of  the  stroke  must  be  reversed. 

3.— When  opposing  curves  lie  in  the  same  direction,  they 
unite  without  an  angle,  and  are  made  with  perfect  freedom. 

Kem.  1.— As  a  general  rule,  when  a  variable  curve  follows  a  curve  of  the 
same  length,  it  may  be  turned  so  as  either  to  unite  without  an  angle  or  to 
face  the  same  way  as  the  curve  to  which  it  is  joined.  The  union  without 
an  angle  takes  the  precedence  where  it  is  equally  convenient. 

Rem.  2. — When  curves  of  different  lengths  unite,  those  facing  are  always 
to  be  preferred,  as  an  angle  must  in  these  cases  always  be  formed. 

4. — These  principles  apply  equally  to  vocal  curves,  and  to 
the  union  of  vocal  and  consonantal  curves. 

Rem.— We  have  Ma  after  E,  and  Em  after  A.  El  follows  E,  and  La  fol- 
lows rt-short ;  and  we  have  the  forms  La-Mid,  land,  and  •  El-i-ent,  lint, 
and  many  others  that  will  be  noticed,  where  the  direction  of  the  letters 
The,  Ith,  Em  and  El  are  varied  on  account  of  a  preceding  or  following  curve. 

5. — These  principles  apply  also  to  the  union  of  curves  with 
straight  lines  or  dashes.  If  a  curved  letter  lies  in  the  same 
general  direction  as  the  straight  line,  though  an  angle  is  needed, 
there  is  a  continuous  movement  in  the  same  direction  favor- 
able to  speed ;  and  if,  added  to  this,  they  unite  without  an 
angle,  the  gain  is  still  greater. 

Rem.  1.— Some  exceptions  to  the  principles  given  in  this  and  preceding 
sections  are  unavoidable,  for  in  many  cases  a  curve  occurs  between  two 
letters,  with  one  or  both  of  which  it  will  unite  with  a  greater  or  less  degree 
of  difficulty.  If  any  of  the  letters  are  variable,  as  in  most  cases  one  or  more 
of  them  will  be,  the  difficulty  can  easily  be  reduced  to  a  single  bad  angle  ; 
but  even  in  case  of  variable  letters,  a  change  that  aids  the  joining  with  a 
preceding  letter  may  increase  the  difficulty  of  joining  with  the  following 
letter,  and  vice  versa.  Cases  of  this  kind  will  afford  scope  for  the  ingenuity 
of  the  writer. 

Rem.  2.— So  in  other  ways  one  principle  may  influence  or  over-ride  the 
operation  of  another  principle.  Such  details  cannot  be  given  here  ;  but  the 
teacher  of  the  art  is  advised  to  add  to  the  illustrations  given,  so  as  to 
adapt  them  to  different  classes  of  his  pupils.  Such  instruction  will  bear 
good  fruit  in  the  increased  beauty  and  facilenss  of  the  outlines. 

SEC.  69.      LlNEALJTY  AND  PHRASING. 

Word-forms  should  have,  so  far  as  possible,  a  forward  instead 
of  a  backward  tendency.  If  the  outline  runs  downward  or 


OF  TAKIGRAFY.  125 


backward,  away  from  the  line  of  writing,  it  frequently  hinders 
phrasing,  and  time  is  lost  in  bringing  the  pen  back  to  the 
proper  place  for  commencing  the  next  word-form. 

Rem.  1.— The  variable  letters  and  the  contractions  may  be  so  used  as  to 
favor  linear  word-forms.  Such  words,  for  instance,  as  public,  publication, 
aggregate,  aggregation,  and  others,  may  be  relieved  from  running  too  far 
below  the  line  by  using  La  and  Ba  instead  of  the  compounds  Bla  and  Gra. 

Rem.  1.— So  much  regard  has  been  paid  to  this  principle  in  the  arrangement 
of  the  alfabet  that  it  will  be  easy  to  secure  good  outlines  by  a  little  atten- 
tion and  care  on  the  part  of  the  writer.  In  any  extreme  case  of  difficulty, 
the  word-form  may  be  divided,  as  in  the  compound  word  book-keeper. 

SEC.  70.    THE  REQUIREMENTS  OF  LEGIBILITY. 
The  requirements  of  legibility  presuppose,  as  a  basis,  a  fair 
degree  of  accuracy  of  penmanship,  and  regard  to  the  proper 
distinctions  in  the  length  and  shading  of  the  letters. 

Rem. — The  student  shoud  be  drilled  on  all  the  elements  introduced  into 
this  style,  contrasting  half-length  and  full-length  characters,  full-length  and 
double  and  treble-lengths,  &c.,  till  he  can  make  the  new  distinctions  as 
readily  as  those  introduced  into  the  first  style. 

1. — The  first  special  requirement  of  legibility  as  applied  to 
word-forms  is  CONSISTENCY  OF  OUTLINE.  When  the  reader  has 
become  accustomed  to  see  a  given  word  written  in  a  given 
way,  he  reads  it  from  memory,  without  looking  through  the 
characters  to  see  what  they  spell.  If  the  form  be  changed  at 
random,  he  will  read  with  slowness  and  uncertainty. 

2. — Another  requsite  of  legibility  is  AN  OBSERVANCE  OF  THE 
LAWS  OF  ANALOGY.  This  will  greatly  aid  the  memory  of  forms, 
and  the  reader,  becoming  accustomed  to  see  a  given  combina- 
tion of  sounds  expressed  in  a  given  way,  will  read  with  cer- 
tainty and  ease. 

Rem.— It  will  be  observed  that  full,  long  vowels  and  diphthongs  separate 
consonants,  and  that  they  generally  accompany  full  and  open  outlines, 
while  small  and  short  vowels  more  frequently  accompany  contracted  forms. 
This  is  especially  true  in  regard  to  the  use  of  the  circle  and  the  compounds 
of  the  L  and  R  series,  and  to  some  extent  of  the  half-length  signs. 

3. — A  third  thing  essential  to  a  legible  style  of  writing  is 
A  PROPER  DISTINCTION  OF  WORDS  containing  the  same  conso- 
nants. If  the  words  in  question  are  of  such  meaning  that 
they  cannot  be  confounded,  theqe  is  no  danger  ;  but  if  they 
are  of  like  or  opposite  significations,  there  is  need  of  a  dis- 
tinct difference  in  the  word-forms. 


126  THE  HAND-BOOK 

4. — A  PROPER  USE  OF  VOCALIZATION  may  be  named  as  a 
fourth  requisite  of  a  legible  style.  A  proper  regard  for  brevity 
will  lead  the  writer  to  omit  all  vowels  that  are  not  necessary  ; 
but  it  is  unwise  economy  to  add  to  the  labor  of  reading  to 
save  a  far  less  labor  in  writing. 

a.  Vowels  are  necessary  in  some  words  containing  only 
one  consonant,  as  boy,  bow,  bough,  ape,  ope,  pie,  pew,  &c. 

b.  Besides  these  there  are  a  larger  number  of  words  of  two 
consonants,  comprising  nearly  all  uncommon  words  that  may 
be  written  in  full,  as  in  the  common  style.     The  following 
will  serve  as  specimens  of  the  words  alluded  to  :  bag,  sag,  cap, 
gap,  map,  rap,  tap,  mob,  sob,  jog,  job,  dame,  cape,  cake,  wake, 
tall,  gall,  &c. 

c.  In  addition  to  these,  many  words  of  three  or  four  con- 
sonants, with  or  without  a  contraction  of  consonant  outline, 
may  be  vocalized,  as  in  blab,  slab,  clod,  plod,  trod,  shad,  clog, 
flog,  grog,  brine,  swine,   twine,   stripe,  strap,  blame,  flame, 
bloom,  flume,  broom,  brim,  trim,  &c. 

Rem. — To  these  words  in  which  the  vocal  sign  is  used  for  the  sake  of 
greater  ease  in  reading  should  be  added  those  mentioned  under  the  rules 
for  the  requirements  of  speed.  Sec.  67  c. 

d.  The  sign  for  I  is  frequently  contracted  by  omitting  one  of 
the  strokes,  and  words  ending  in  ny  may  be  written  in  analogy 
with  any,  by  adding  the  tick.     The  last  remark  applies  to 
such  words  as  bony,  stony,  cony,  funny,  honey,  briny,  &c. 

e.  When  two  vocal  sounds  occur  together,  as  in  the  words 
aerial,  pean,  pious,  science,  &c.,  one  or  both  of  the  vowels 
should  be  written.     The  former,  -which  is  in  most  cases  the 
accented  vowel,  is  to  be  preferred  when  equally  convenient. 

/.  Vocalization  will  be  frequently  necessary  in  the  follow- 
ing cases : — 

1. — In  writing  proper  names  of  persons  and  places. 

2. — In  quotations  from  the  Latin,  Greek,  German,  French, 
and  other  foreign  languages. 

3. — In  technical  terms  used  in  the  arts  and  sciences. 

4. — In  all  unusual  words,  or  words  used  in  an  unusual  con- 
nection, or  in  a  peculiar  sense. 

Rem.  1. — Words  generally  considered  technical  or  uncommon  may  be 
sufficiently  familiar  to  some  persons  to  be  treated  like  ordinary  word* ; 


OF  TAKIGRAFY.  127 


and  some  quotations  from  foreign  languages  are  so  familiar  that  they  may 
be  contracted  like  ordinary  phrases,  as,  for  instance,  vice  versa,  viva  voce. 
The  purpose  of  the  writing,  and  the  knowledge  of  the  subject,  will  deter- 
mine the  amonut  of  vocalization  necessary  to  perspicuity.  It  is  only  neces- 
sary that  the  manuscript  be  easily  read  by  the  persons,  and  for  the  pur- 
poses, for  which  it  was  written. 

Rem.  2.  — The  careless  writing  of  bare  skeletons  of  consonant  letters,  with- 
out any  reference  to  their  legibility,  so  common  among  amateurs  in  Phonog- 
raphy, should  be  discouraged  by  the  teacher. 

5. — A  fifth  requirement  of  legibility  is  A  PROPER  REGARD    TO 

THE  RELATIONS  Of  WORDS  IN  THE  SENTENCE. 

Words  that  are  used  in  familiar  phrases,  or  in  constructions 
that  are  familiar,  become  more  easily  legible  from  the  connec- 
tion in  which  they  stand.  But  words  that  are  isolated,  or  used 
in  unusual  connections,  or  in  peculiar  senses,  demand  more 
care  in  the  writing  to  render  them  easily  legible. 

Rem.  1.— The  power  of  position  in  a  sentence  to  add  to  the  legibility  of 
word-forms  is  illustrated  in  nearly  all  the  phrases  given  in  Tables  and 
Reading  Lessons.  Properly  made  phrase-signs  will  aid  the  reader  by  making 
the  connection  of  the  words  more  noticeable.  The  word  same,  for  instance, 
becomes  definite  in  the  phrase  the  same,  since  the  word  some  is  never  pre- 
ceded by  the  article  tlie.  The  joining  of  words,  however,  not  associated 
in  sense,  would  lesson  rather  than  increase  the  ease  of  reading  by  intimating 
a  connection  between  the  words  that  did  not  exist. 

Rem.  2. — Where  words  are  isolated  in  construction,  as  in  the  following 
sentences,  they  need  to  be  distinguishable  in  form.  But  the  fruit  of  the 
spirit  is  lone,  joy,  peace,  long-suffering,  gentleness,  goodness,  faith,  meekness, 
temperance.  Can  youth,  or  health,  or  strength,  or  honor,  or  pleasure  satisfy  the 
soul?  I  have  seen  (fie  effects  of  love  and  hatred,  joy  and  grief,  hope  and  despair. 

Even  in  these  cases,  the  reader  is  aided  somewhat  by  the  context,  for  he 
would  not  look  for  any  evil  affection  or  passion  among  the  fruits  of  the 
spirit ;  and  in  the  last  example,  the  contrast  suggests  the  contrasted  word. 
So  in  nearly  all  cases  the  context  will  aid  the  reader  to  a  greater  or  less 
extent ;  but  he  should  not  rely  too  much  upon  it,  but  take  care  that  all  iso- 
lated words  be  written  clearly  and  definitely. 

Rem.  3. — Uncommon  words,  and  those  of  doubtful  signification,  with 
words  from  foreign  languages,  mentioned  in  the  preceding  section,  cannot, 
from  the  nature  of  the  case,  be  referred  with  safety  to  the  context  for 
explanation,  but  must  be  legible  independent  of  their  connection. 

4.— Proper  names  that  are  mentioned  among  words  needing  vocalization 
may  also  be  considered  as  isolated  words,  as  they  are  not  generally  inferable 
from  the  sense  of  the  passage  in  which  they  stand. 

5,— Outlines  chosen  for  autographs  should  be  easily  legible, 


128  THE  HAND-BOOK 


11. 


* 


fc-*  7  '    "} 


o9 


_    ^  . 


'v^—  u  . 


X, 


y 


<y 

? 


{ 


V 


U 


OF  TAKIGBAFY.  129 


WRITING  EXERCISE  19. 

Note. — The  list  of  words  given  in  this  and  the  following  Exercise,  may  bo 
indefinitely  increased. 

Words  in  which  each  syllable  is  written  by  a  single  stroke. 

App-li-ca-ble  tre-men-dous-ly  pros-per-ous  des-pi-ca-ble  ob- 
sti-nate  occ-u-py  ra-mi-fy  re-me-dy  di-gress-ive  vul-can-ize 
co-rro-bo-rate  de-lu-sive  coil-apse  pro-pri-e-ty  dis-cri-min- 
ate  de-press-ing  dis-grace-ful  ar-o-ma  na-vi-ga-tor. 

Contract  or  omit  the  italicised  syllables:  In-ves-fa'-gate  en-a- 
mor sen-si-tive  a-nal-a-gous  man-ip-wZafe  reg-u-larity  dex- 
terity pre-rog-a-tive  in-con-sol-a-ble  ab-ne-gation  re-susci- 
tate  ne-cessi-ty  in-def-i-nite  un-con-sti-tu-fa'onaZ. 

The  vocal  sign  may  be  used  in  these  words  : 

Bee  bay  obey  bah  !  boo  !  boy  bough  pea  pay  pa  pooh  ! 
poe  paw  pie  pew  ape  ope.  Gay  guy  ague.  Key  coo  Co. 
caw  cue  coy  cow.  Eke  ache  oak  auk.  Day  dough  daw 
die  dew  owed  awed  adieu  idea.  Tea  tow  toe  tie  toy  eat 
oat  iota  eight. 

Eve  vie  view  vow.  Fee  fie  few  shay  shy  Asia  ease 
ooze  owes  awes.  Thaw  thigh  thew  ma  moo  maw  mow 
(o)  mow  (ou)  aim  ohm  knee  nay  no  know  gnaw  nigh  e'en 
awn  lee  lay  loo  la !  law  lie  lieu  eel  ale  awl  isle  ail  owl 
ear  ore  ire  woo  woe. 

Babe  baby  bake  bib  bob  booby  peep  pipe  pip  pap  pop 
poppy  big  bag  bog  back  pig  pick  pack  pike  peak  beam 
boom  bean  bane  boon  pawn  pean  piano  puny  poach.  Gab 
gap  cab  cob  cape  cap  gig  kick  gag  cog  cake  keen  cane 
gain  couch.  Deep  dupe  tap  top  dig  tick  dock  tack  tag. 
Fib  fob  fop  fugue  file  fuel  fowl  feel  fool  foal  vile  vowel 
veal  vine  fine  fawn.  Sheep  shape  shake  shale.  Deal  dale 
doll  teal  tale  tile  toil  towel  tear  tier  tore  tower  door  dyer 
dower.  Shear  shore  shower. 

Meek  maim  main  mayor  mire  meal  mail  mall  mils 
nail  Nile  lean  lane  loon  line  lion.  Blab  clad  clod  crib 
crab  creep  crape  croup  crop  drab  drip  droop  drop  trip 
trap  troop  tripe  trick  track  freak  shriek  streak  strike  sleep 
sloop  slip  slab  slap  slag  slack  slake  sleek.  Bream  brooi:i 
brawn  bruin  brine  bloom  blain  cream  groom. 


130  THE  HAND-BOOK 

WRITING  EXERCISE  20. 

Abner  Albert  Aurelius  Aaron  Anderson  Antony  Arnold 
Arthur  Auerbach  Augustine.  Biddle  Baldwin  Bierstadt 
Byron  Brainard  Bryan.  Cathcart  Cheever  Clark  Cleopatra 
Caleb  Cyprian  Conway  Confucius.  Daguerre  Dayton  Darius 
Dahlgren  Delancey  Dickerson  DeWitt  Dry  den  Dumas 
D wight.  Eleazar  Eliliu  Elijah  Enoch  Ephriam.  Fabius 
Fahrenheit  Faraday  Fernando  Fowler.  Uallileo  Galvani 
Garrison  Gavazzi  Guyot  Gabriel  Garret  Geoffrey  Gideon 
Griffith. 

Habakkuk  Haldeman  Hancock  Hahnemann  Hardee  Have- 
meyer  Harvey  Hawthorne  Hezekiah  Hiram  Heintzelman 
Horace  Hayne  Heliodorus  Horatio  Hosea  Hilary  Hoadley 
Holmes  Homer  Howells  Howard  Hopkins. 

Ingraham  Ivison  Ichabod  Ingelow  Isaac  Isaiah  Iscariot 
Israel  Ishmael.  Jackson  Jacob  Jairus  Jabez  Jedekiah 
Jeremiah  Jeroboam  Josiah  Judah  Joab  Joel.  Knowlton 
Karl  Kavanagh  Kilpatrick  Kossuth. 

Lafayette  Lamartine  Lapham  Larrabee  Lazarus  Lewis 
Lawrence  Lambert  Leander  Levi  Lewellyn  Longfellow 
Lucius  Latham  Lathrop  Liebig  Lincoln  Livermore  Luther 
Linnaeus  Lippincott  Lowenstein  Loyola  Lyell  Lyon  Luke 
Lyman  Lubin  Lucian  Lycurgus. 

Mahomet  Marryat  Macaulay  Marmaduke  Malachi  IVIaury 
Machiavelli  Maccabees  Martineau  Matthias  Mayor  Meyer- 
beer Moses.  Nathan  Neal  Naaman  Naomi  Neander  Newton 
Nehemiah  Nero  Norman.  Obadiah  Oliver  Orlando  Owen 
O'Leary  O'Reilly  O'Rourke  O'Dowd.  Packard  Patrick  Paley 
Parker  Parnell  Patti  Peabody  Pharaoh  Philander  Philip 
Pierpont  Pizarro  Pitman  Plato  Porter  Proctor  Ptolemy. 

Ralph  Rudolph  Roland  Ransom  Raphael  Randolph  Randall 
Raymond  Reviere  Rollin  Rousseau  Rupert  Rufus. 

Saul  Silas  Simon  Simeon  Sullivan  Spinosa  Shakspeare 
Schuyler  Talleyrand  Taylor  Tallmage  Thaddeus  Theodore 
Thackeray  Tilford  Tobiah  Tybalt  Tyndall  Tiberius  Thiers 
Uriah  Volney  Victor. 

Waldo  Warren  Walter  Warner  Willard  Wagner  Wyatt 
Way  land  Whitefield  Wilkinson  Whittier  Winelow  Wayne 


OF  TAKIGRAFY.  131 

Williams    Wycliffe.     Yancy    Youatt    Zachariah    Zedekiah. 

Abigail  Adaline  Adelaide  Agatha  Agnes  Almira  Amabel 
Angelica  Angelina  Arabella  Aurelia.  Barbara  Beatrice 
Belinda  Blanche.  Catharina  Charlotte  Celia  Chloe  Clara 
Claudia  Clementina  Clarice  Cora.  Delia  Diana  Dora  Edith 
Elizabeth  Elvina  Eudora  Eugenia  Euphemia  Evangeline 
Evelina.  Fanny  Fidelia  Flora  Frances  Fredrica. 

Georgiana  Grace  Gratia  Griselda  Henrietta  Hortensia 
Helena  Hannah  Honora.  Ida  Inez  Irene  Joyce  Justina 
Jaqueline  Leonora  Letitia  Lilian  Lois  Louisa  Lydia  Laura 
Lavina.  Mabel  Magdalena  Marcia  Maria  Matilda  Mildred 
Mary  Maud  Miriam  Miranda.  Nina  Nora  Octavia  Olive 
Ophelia  Olympia  Patience  Paula  Phebe  Phillipa  Polly. 
Rhoda  Rosa  Rosalind  Sabina  Salome  Selina  Serena  Sophia 
Theodora  Tryphosa  Victoria  Vida  Viola  Vivian  Una. 

Alabama  Alaska  Iowa  Adelphi  Adrian  Agawam  Ains- 
worth  Albany  Albion  Alexandria  Algeria  Algiers  Alton 
Algona  Alleghany  Allendale  Alliance  Almira  Amesbury 
Andalusia  Angola  Annapolis  Ann  Arbor  Anoka  Ansonia 
Antietam  Antrim  Applegate  Appleton  Arabia  Arapahoe 
Ararat  Arcadia  Arcola  Argyle  Ashborough  Ashford  Ashta- 
bula  Aspinwall  Ashton  Astoria  Auburn  Augusta  Aurora 
Austria  Avondale. 

Babylon  Bagdad  Bangor  Batavia  Bavaria  Belleview 
Bayfield  Beloit  Belvidere  Blackburn  Bracketville  Brainard 
Buffalo  Cairo  Calais  Canaan  Canada  Cape  May  Cayuga 
China  Cincinnati  Cleveland  Clinton  Coffeeville  Cresco 
Cuyahoga.  Darien  Delhi  DesMoines  Dixie. 

WRITING  EXERCISE  21. 

Quotations  from  the  Latin,  Greek,  and  French  languages. 

LATiN.-Ab  origine.  Ab  uno  disce  omnes.  A  Deo  et  rege.  Ad 
captandum  vulgus.  A  fortiori,  JEre  perrenius.  Alia  tentanda 
via  est.  Alieni  appetens,  sui  profusus.  A  mensa  et  thoro. 
Bis  dat  qui  cito  dat.  Certiorari.  Dum  spiro,  spero.  Ex  nihilo 
nihil  fit.  Faber  suse  fortunae.  Vi  et  armis.  Una  voce.  Toto 
ccelo.  Suum  cuique.  Sine  odio.  Sic  volo,  sic  jubeo. 

FRENCH. — A  la  belle  etoile.  Ami  de  cour.  Amour  fait  beau 
coup,  mais  argent  fait  tout.  Honi  soit  qui  mal  y  pense. 


132  THE  HAND-BOOK 

GREEK. — To  prepen.   Hoi  polloi.   To  kalon.   Ariston  metron. 
TECHNICAL  TERMS. — Adularia  amphilogy  anthoid  autotypy 
biparietal  Calceolaria  exuviae  heliotype. 


A  UNIVERSAL  ALFABET. — We  cannot  but  render  homage  to 
the  efforts  made  by  the  powerful  minds  of  those  who  have 
striven  to  reduce  to  a  satisfactory  unity  the  lamentable  diver- 
sity of  signs  (alphabets)  which  have  thrown  such  obstacles  in 
the  way  of  truth,  and  either  by  fortuitous  or  designed  resem- 
blance, have  so  long  retarded  the  progress  of  the  comparative 
study  of  languages,  and  their  etymological  affinity,  so  impor- 
tant to  their  philosophical  development,  and,  consequently,  the 
knowledge  of  their  real  origin,  as  well  as  of  the  characters 
employed  in  Writing, — fundamental  principles  which,  in  re- 
ferring each  language  to  its  true  source,  would  enable  us  to 
study  each  group  of  languages  at  the  same  time,  and  thus  to 
obtain  (if  it  were  possible  to  devote  sufficient  time  to  each)  a 
universal  knowledge  of  languages. 

To  illustrate  this  proposition  by  an  example,  the  study  of  the 
languages  named  Arabic,  Hebrew,  Samaritan,  Ethiopic,  Syriac 
and  Chaldean  might,  to  a  certain  extent,  be  reduced  to  the 
study  of  only  one,  and  a  knowledge  of  the  alphabets  of  each 
of  the  others, — alphabets  founded,  for  the  most  part,  upon 
circumstances  which  have  wholly  past  away ,  but  which,  never- 
theless, have  given,  and  still  continue  to  give,  to  each  of  the 
above-named  languages  an  appearance  of  individuality  which 
they  do  not  in  reality  possess,  but  which  will  subsist  until  this 
appearance  shall  vanish,  and  all  these  languages  be  written 
with  the  same  alphabet,  whereby  it  would  at  once  be  apparent 
that  they  are  really  dialects  of  one  and  the  same  mother-lan- 
guage,— the  Arabic.  An  able  professor,  who  should  occupy 
his  scholars  in  this  wide  field  of  inquiry,  explaining  the  rules 
of  the  mother-tongue,  and  the  exceptions  and  peculiar  char- 
acter of  its  dialects,  might  teach  six  languages,  or  rather  an 
entire  family  of  languages  at  the  same  time. 

An  analagous  idea,  but  of  less  easy  execution,  has  been  sug- 
gested, namely,  the  composition  of  a  universal  alphabet,  or 
one  embracing  at  least  all  the  languages  of  Europe. 

SYLVESTRE'S  PALAEOGRAPHY. 


CHAPTER   XII.  —  MISCELLANEOUS   CONTRACTIONS. 

SEC.  71.    CONSONANT  LETTERS  OMITTED. 

1.  —  Pe  is  frequently  omitted  when  it  follows  Ka  ;  and  Ka 
when  it  follows  Te  and  Ing,  as  in  description  distinction. 

2.  —  Te  is  omitted  after  the  circle  in  some  cases,  as  in  mostly, 

3.  —  En,  El,  Ar,  Ya,  and  Ha,  are  omitted  in  some  words, 
though  Ha  is  more  frequently  contracted  to  a  tick. 

4.  —  Other  letters  may  be  omitted  where  brevity  or  conven- 
ience requires  it,  though  such  omission  should  be  restricted  to 
cases  where  the  regular  form  is  especially  inconvenient. 

Examples. 


1.  Description  subscription   destruction  instruction  sanction  distinction. 

2.  Post-boy  plastic  domestic  rustic  vastly    listless  mostly    restlessness. 

3.  Continue       attenuate     unionist       identical       companion        behave. 

4.  Behavior  behoof  hopeful  happy  unhappy  repi-ehend  compr'nd  appr'nsion. 

ADDITIONAL  WORDS  IN  WHICH  LETTERS  ARE  OMITTED. 

Omit  P:    Prescription  proscription  rescription. 

Omit  K:  Production  productive  induction  inductive 
seduction  seductive  reduction  function  conjunction. 

Omit  T:  Sophistic  elastic  mystic  majestic  paraphrastic 
bombastic  postpone  postage  fastness  justly  lastly  jesticulate 
investigate  testament  testimony  testimonial. 

Omit  N,  L,  R,  H  or  F  :  Tenement  attainment  atonement. 
Million  billion  millionaire.  Tolerable  toleration  venerable. 
Behave  behoove  behoof  reprehend  convenient  conveniently 
convenience,  and  their  derivatives. 

133 


134 


THE  HAND-BOOK 


ADDITIONAL  WORD-SIGNS. 

We  give  below  a  few  additional  word-signs.  They  do  not 
comprise  all  that  may  be  employed.  Each  special  department 
of  Reporting  will  have  its  own  special  class  of  word-and 
phrase-signs,  in  addition  to  those  given  in  the  Hand-Book. 


, 


KEY." 

1.  —  U.  S.  New  Eng.  Atlantic  Ocean,  Pacific  Ocean,  Canada,  Ontario, 
Quebec,  New  Brunswick,  Nova  Scotia,  Newfoundland,  Prince  Edward  I. 

2.—  Ala.   Alaska   Arizona    Ark.    Cal.    Colo.   Conn.   Dakota  Del. 

3.—  Fla.   Ga.   Idaho   111.    Ind.   Indian  Ter.   Iowa  Kansas   Ky.  La. 

4.—  Me.   Md.    Mass.    Mich.    Minn.    Miss.    Mo.   Montana   Neb.   Nevada. 

5.—  N.  H.   N.  J.   New  Mex.    N.  Y.  N.  C.   Ohio   Oregon-  Pa.   R.  I.    S.  C. 

6.—  Tenn.   Texas  Utah  Vt.  Va.   Wash.  W.  Va.  Wis.    Wyoming. 

7.—  Monday  Tuesday  Wednesday  Thursday  Friday  Saturday  Sunday. 

8.  —Occupation    occupant    occupy    correspond     correspondence     gold 
doubt  acquaint  tenement  testament  Pentateuch  stupendous. 
DUPLICATE  WORD-SIGNS. 

We  give  new  signs  for  the  words  were,  where,  what,  would. 
The  signs  for  were  and  where  may  be  used  to  the  exclusion  of 
the  old  signs  ;  but  the  signs  for  what  and  would  should  be 
regarded  as  only  additional  signs,  those  previously  introduced 
being  employed  when  more  convenient.  You,  and  you  will, 
have  also  duplicate  forms. 


OF  TAKIGRAFY. 


135 


1 

ADDITIONAL 

WORD-SlGNS. 
convenient            [/~> 

perfect-ion 

Before                      ^) 

L 

J 

behind 
believe                    ^? 

enough                   3 
influence                "} 

proclaim 
privilege 

J 

beneath                   ^ 

acknowledge    /1'VS 

economy 

V 

accept                       / 

large                      \ 

iniquity 

\ 

ascribe                    -^ 

therefore               c 

caU 

^~ 

advertisement          ^ 

amount                  ^ 

catastrophe 

•*• 

distinguish       ,       vO 
differ                    ^~\ 

never                   ""V, 
neglect                     / 

accordingly 
dominion 

<-,. 

Almighty                 "^^\ 

anythhig                 "^ 

Takigrafy 

<*_ 

astonish                   \^ 

nothing                    ~\ 

\ 

Fonografy 

c~ 

toward                     9 

virtue                   ^~~^ 

sublime 

C 

were                       ^) 

life                        xt 

image-ine 

c 

where                     ^J 

year                   ( 

member 

D 

would                    zf^ 

beyond                  o 

elsewhere 

3 

9 

what                      c  —  r 
whatsoever 

change                   J 
judge                  /& 

behold 
resemble 

\ 

<y 

whence 

church                  ^f 
catholic              ^^ 

railroad 
railway 

whensoever           \ 

1 

whosesoever          r^ 

question                ^s* 

her 

136  THE  HAND-BOOK 

SEC.  72.    DERIVATIVE  WORD-SIGNS. 

These  signs  follow  principles  already  explained  ;  and  will  be 
understood  from  the  table  on  the  opposite  page.  In  many 
cases  the  termination  ed  is  omitted,  and  ly  may  be  disjoined. 

KEY. 
The  words  commencing  each  line  in  the  engraved  page  are  capitalized. 

Accept-ed  acceptance  acceptation  acceptable  unacceptable 
accompanied  accompanying  accompaniment  unaccompanied. 
Accomodate-ed  accomodating  unaccomodating  accordingly 
account-ed  accounting  accountable  accountant  acknowl- 
edge-ed  acknowledging  unacknowledged.  Advantage-ed  ad- 
vantageous disadvantage  disadvantageously  ambiguously 
applicability  apprehend-ed  ascribe-ed  assurance  assures 
astonishingly.  Beforehand  behindhand  believing  believ- 
ingly  benevolently  benignantly  briefer  unbusinesslike  capa- 
bility incapable.  Interchange  characterize  characteristic 
companionable  committee  noncommital  confederate-ed  con- 
federation. Congratulation  nonconductor  inconsequent  con- 
spicuously noncontemporaneous  contradictory  uncontra- 
dict-ed  conversational.  Uncorrect-ed  culpability  deflcient-cy 
deliverer  denominational  undenominational  delinquency 
discontinuance.  Undistinguishable  employed  employer  un- 
employed disestablish  unexampled  externality  extraordi- 
narily Disfigured  disfiguration  phonografic  out-general-ed 
glorify-ed  government  ungovernable  ingratitude  habitual. 
Habituated  holiness  short-hand  hand-writing  unhandy  un- 
happiness  heartlessness  disheartened.  Imaginary  imagination, 
immediately  unimportant  infatuation  infidelity  inheritance 
iniquities-ous  uninstructed.  Enlarged  longer  longest  what- 
ever whatsoever  wherever  wherefore.  Wherein  whereof 
whereon  whereunto  justice  injustice  larger  largest  man- 
ufacturer monopolize. 

Dismember-ed  remember  unremembered  probability  im- 
probable proclamation  prognostication  unproductive.  Privi- 
leged republican  unpublished  unquestionable  rulable  repre- 
sentation irregularity  respectability  resemblance.  Remark- 
able satisfaction  unsatisfactory  secretaryship  school-master 
school-district  school-house  signification  insignificant 
strengthened.  Sublimity  suggested  suggestive  suggestively 
suspected  tachygraphic  university  universality  valuation. 


OF   TAKIGRAFY. 


137 


4  ~t 


-  \ 


\ 


3> 


—    7      ^       °)       ^ 

K 

^ 

vp 


v  ^  V  p 


138  THE  HAND-BOOK 

SEC.  73.  WORDS  DISTINGUISHED  BY  DIFFERENCE  OF  OUTLINE. 

(See  Remark  at  the  bottom  of  page  140.) 

KEY  TO  OPPOSITE  PAGE. 

The  words  commencing  each  line  in  the  engraved  page  are  capitalized. 
The  words  to  be  contrasted  are  not  separated  by  commas : 
Abandoned  abundant,  abase  base  bias,  beast  boast  biased 
bestow  beset,  bindery  boundary  binder.  Bright  broad, 
brightens  broadens,  brightness  broadness,  broth  breath 
birth,  barrel  burial  barley.  Absolute  obsolete,  compatible 
computable,  pitiable  potable,  patted  petted  pitied  puttied, 
probation  approbation  prohibition.  Persecute  prosecute, 
persecution  prosecution,  apportion  portion,  preparation 
proportion  appropriation,  proportioned  proportionate,  prop- 
erty propriety  appropriate.  Perspective  prospective,  pre- 
scribe proscribe,  petrify  putrify,  petrifaction  putrifaction, 
patron  pattern,  pester  poster  pasture.  Apology  pillage 
pledge,  pulse  police  policy,  planet  plenty  pliant  com- 
pletion compulsion  compilation,  placid  pellucid.  Per- 
haps propose,  part  port,  party  pretty  purity,  protection 
production  prediction,  pertain  appertain,  pretend  portend. 
Parade  parody  period,  approach  preach  parch  perch  porch, 
prefer  proffer,  pervious  previous,  peruse.  Pursue  pierce, 
perspire  prosper,  priest  pressed,  poorest  purest  pursuit, 
person  parson,  percent  personate  present.  Parcel  parasol 
parsley,  Prussia  Persia,  Persian  Parisian  Prussian,  operation 
oppression,  permanent  preeminent  prominent.  Permanence 
preeminence  prominence,  perilous  peerlees  powerless,  precise, 
process  spirit  separate  support,  separating  spiriting  supporting. 
God  good  guide,  garden  guardian,  cost  caused,  collision 
collusion  coalition,  corporal  corporeal,  creature  creator. 
Sacred  secret,  exterminate  extremity  data  date  dote  debt 
doubt  diet  duet  ditty  duty.  Auditor  daughter  debtor 
deter  editor  doubter,  auditory  dietary,  defense  defiance 
defines.  Defer  differ  defray  devour,  adverse  diverse  divers 
divorce,  decease  disease  diocese.  Deceased  diseased  dis- 
tribute disturbed,  adultery  idolatry,  diligent  indulgent 
indigent.  Diligence  indulgence  indigence,  damnation  domi- 
nation dimension,  deablate  dissolute,  adorns  durance. 


OF  TAKIGRAFY. 


139 


WORDS  DISTINGUISHED  BY  DIFFERENCE  OF  OUTLINE. 


U, 


a, 


l^l/V  IX   IX? 

i 

1- 


V 


140  THE  HAND-BOOK 


KEY  TO  OPPOSITE  PAGE. 

Tartar  traitor  trader  territory,  tariff  terrify  trophy,  tor- 
rent tyrant  truant.  City  set  seat  sight  sought,  steady  study 
stead  stood  staid.  Train  turn,  vileness  violence  villainous, 
evolution  volition  violation,  valuable  available,  violent 
valiant.  Avocation  vocation,  invasion  innovation,  ever  every 
over  very,  fiscal  physical  vesicle,  fence  fans  feigns  fines. 
Offense  affiance,  farce  force  furious,  fallen  flown,  form 
farm  frame  firm,  fairness  furnace.  Flail,  furl  furlow,  funeral 
funereal,  fretful  fruitful,  shortly  shrewdly,  assist  essay est 
society.  Thee  they  though  thou  thy,  man  men,  impas- 
sioned impassionate  impatient,  machine  mission  motion 
emotion.  Machinery  missionary,  cemetery  symmetry,  emi- 
grant immigrant,  minister  monster,  ministry  monastery. 
Necessity  incest  insist,  inconcealable  inconsolable,  incon- 
vincible  invincible  invisible,  inebriate  inbred  imbrued,  end- 
less needless.  Indefinite  undefined,  ingenious  ingenuous, 
inevitable  unavoidable,  center  centaur  sentry.  Signs  sense 
science,  assignees  assigns,  sinner  sooner  snare  snore  sneer 
scenery.  Sinless  sunless,  star  store  starry  story  stray  astray, 
elaborate  labored,  altitude  latitude.  Latter  later  letter 
lighter  loiter  lottery  ultra,  likely  luckily  locally,  learnt 
learned.  Reparation  repression,  orator  writer,  oratory  artery, 
arrive  review,  arrival  rival  reveille.  Rebel  re-bel,  resume 
reassume,  round  ruined  renewed  wronged,  earlier  railer 
roller  ruler.  Revelation  revolution  revulsion,  leave  live 
lave  love,  lead  led  load  lad,  gentle  genteel.  Raid  read  red 
road  rude,  rate  right  write  rote  root  rout,  equality  quality. 


Eemark.  —In  applying  the  principles  of  contraction,  a  difference  of  out- 
line is  possible  In  many  cases.  Words  of  the  same  consonant  letters  can  be 
written  with  or  without  vowels,  and  with  a  greater  or  less  degree  of  con- 
traction. The  forms  chosen,  as  taught  in  the  previous  chapter,  should  be 
such  as  to  best  indicate  the  nature  of  the  vowel,  and  its  place  in  the  outline. 
An  observance  of  these  principles  leads  of  itself  to  a  sufficient  difference  of 
outline  in  most  cases  to  insure  legibility.  It  is  not  necessary  that  all  words 
should  be  distinguished  by  a  difference  of  outline.  If  two  words  are  writ- 
ten alike,  their  nature  and  use  frequently  make  them  sufficiently  intelligible  ; 
but  in  some  other  cases  the  context  will  not  serve  to  make  the  meaning 
clear  without  a  difference  of  outline.  The  preceding  list  embraces  words 
that  it  is  well  generally  to  distinguish. 


OF  TAKIGRAFY. 


141 


WORDS  DISTINGUISHED  BY  DIFFERENCE  OF  OUTLINE. 


\A    Is    2 


-5 


o^_S>  Q_P 


ifi_J> 


V 


142  THE  HAND-BOOK 

SEC.  74.    SPECIAL  METHODS  OF  ABBREVIATION,  ETC. 

In  most  kinds  of  work  the  student  will  be  able  to  make 
abbreviations  not  given  in  the  text-books.  Frequently  recur- 
ring phrases  may  be  shortened  to  any  desirable  extent,  though 
they  might  be  quite  unintelligible  used  in  any  other  connec- 
tion. In  a  rail-road  office,  for  instance,  the  name  of  the  com- 
pany, and  of  the  leading  connecting  lines,  may  be  used  so 
frequently  as  to  be  intelligible  with  the  slightest  indication  ; 
and  in  the  dictation  of  letters,  the  employer  may  be  partial  to 
certain  modes  of  expression,  which  recur  with  such  frequency 
that  to  write  them  in  full  would  be  quite  unnecessary.  Ex- 
amples of  this  kind  are  given  with  key. 
INITIAL  LETTERS. 

In  some  cases  the  long-hand  initials  may  be  found  conven- 
ient, especially  where  the  letters  occur  that  are  not  used  with 
their  proper  phonetic  significance ;  as,  C.  B.  and  Q.,  for  Chi- 
cago, Burlington  and  Quincy  Railroad.  A.  B.  C.  F.  M.  for 
American  Board  of  Commissioners  for  Foreign  Missions,  etc. 
If,  however,  the  initials  are  written  in  Takigrafic  letters,  C 
may  be  indicated  by  Es-E,  and  Q  by  Ka-Ew,  O  soft  by  Ja-E, 
hard  G  by  Oa,  Ph  by  P,  etc.  See  illustrations. 
SEC.  75.  TRANSCRIPTION. 

Having  acquired  facility  in  writing,  and  in  reading  what 
he  has  written,  the  student  will  need,  before  engaging  in  pro- 
fessional work,  to  be  able  to  transcribe  his  writing  in  a  correct 
manner.  He  must  understand  paragraphing  and  punctuation, 
and  the  art  generally  of  reproducing  in  a  readable  form, 
speeches,  debates,  trials,  etc. ,  which  are  in  many  cases,  full 
of  errors  to  be  corrected,  and  redundancies  to  be  eliminated. 

Rem.  1. — In  some  kinds  of  work  the  student  will  have  no  difficulties  of  this 
kind.  If  a  corresponding  clerk  in  a  business  house  or  office,  his  employer 
will  be  quite  likely  to  dictate  letters  and  other  memoranda  in  the  form  in 
which  he  wishes  them  written.  Lectures  also  and  set  speeches  of  a  polished 
character  may  generally  be  reproduced  without  alteration.  Now  if  the 
student  wishes  to  reproduce  what  he  has  written  accurately,  he  must  indi- 
cate in  his  manuscript  every  full  pause,  ev.  ry  abrupt  transition,  and  may 
frequently  mark  the  paragraphs,  which  will  be  more  readily  understood 
when  listening  to  the  discourse  than  when  reading  the  notes.  If,  how- 
ever, the  work  is  of  a  different  nature,  as  in  reporting  extemporaneous 
speeches,  which  abound  in  repetitions,  and  in  which  the  language  is  chosen 


OF  TAKIGRAFY.  143 


with  little  regard  to  fitness  or  perspicuity,  it  is  often  necessary  to  condense 
the  language,  or  in  many  cases  to  change  it  altogether  ;  and  in  such  cases, 
the  reporter  who  can  produce  the  "  best  report  in  the  fewest  number  of 
words,"  is  the  best  reporter. 

Hem.  2.— Whether  the  reports  of  our  judicial  proceedings  shall  be  con- 
densed, is  a  question  for  the  courts  themselves,  or  for  the  lawyers  who 
employ  reporters,  to  decide.  The  present  practice  is  not  uniform,  though 
some  condensation  is,  we  think,  necessary  and  generally  allowed. 

SEC.  76.    PUNCTUATION. 

The  common  marks  for  punctuation  may  be  used  in  Takig- 
rafy,  as  in  common  manuscript.  In  note-taking  only  the 
principal  pauses  need  be  inserted.  The  following  additional 
marks  may  be  found  of  service. 

Doubt,  Parentheses,  Applause,  Dash,  Laughter,  Index,  Paragraph,  Hyphen. 

SEC.  77.    AIDS. 

1. — The  student  has  already  been  advised  of  the  importance 
of  providing  himself  with  dictionaries,  cyclopedias  and 
gazetteers,  for  reference.  In  some  kinds  of  work  he  will  need 
other  books.  A  library  of  miscellaneous  works  might,  on 
occasion,  be  serviceable  ;  but  this  is  a  luxury  that  every  stu- 
dent cannot  expect  to  command,  unless  he  is  in  connection 
with  some  public  institution ;  and  in  that  case  he  ought,  at 
least,  to  know  the  worth  of  books,  and  how  to  use  them. 

Hem.  1. — Suppose,  for  instance,  you  are  writing  out  the  deposition  of 
witnesses,  and  have  failed  to  get  the  proper  spelling  of  the  names  of  the 
witnesses ;  if  in  a  city,  you  may  find  them  in  the  City  Directory.  Or,  suppose 
that  a  lawyer  has  ended  a  brilliant  speech  with  a  still  more  brilliant  quo- 
tation from  some  well-known  author,  which  was  deli vered  too  rapidly  for 
perfect  writing ;  it  is  then  convenient  to  have  the  work  at  hand  from  which 
the  selection  was  made. 

These  are  mere  hints,  which  the  student  will  improve,  by  availing  himself 
of  all  aids  and  means  of  information  that  come  in  his  way.  He  should  not. 
trust  too  much  to  his  own  memory,  or  acquired  sources  of  information, 
though  the  more  he  can  do  to  render  these  trust-worthy,  the  better  it  will  be 
for  him  in  his  work. 

Rem.  2.— There  are  other  special  aids  which  the  young  reporter  or  aman- 
uensis can  avail  himself  of,  such  as  the  short-hand  magazines  published 
in  the  interest  of  his  profession.  If  he  neglects  to  take  these,  he  deprives 
himself  of  aid  and  assistance  peculiarly  appropriate.  Takigrafers  will 


144  THE  HAND-BOOK 

naturally  take  the  Takigrafic  publications  ;  they  should  also  take,  if  possible, 
the  leading  magazines  devoted  to  Phonography.  Some  of  the  Phonographic 
works  will  also  be  found  useful  in  giving  suggestions  of  a  miscellaneous 
character.  If  lawyers,  physicians  and  clergymen  have  their  libraries,  and 
magazines  devoted  to  their  profession,  why  should  the  young  reporter  re- 
gard himself  as  independent  of  such  aids  ?  His  profession  is  no  less  exten- 
sive than  theirs  and  If  his  present  position  does  not  call  for  any  great  skill  or 
for  much  information,  it  certainly  cannot  be  amiss  for  him  to  be  pre- 
pared for  one  higher  and  and  more  exacting. 

SEC.  78.    CONCLUDING  INSTRUCTIONS. 

The  instruction  given  in  the  preceding  pages,  if  well  and  faithfully  fol- 
lowed, will  lead  the  student  to  a  correct  and  sufficiently  brief  reporting 
style.  Should  he,  however,  reach  this  portion  of  the  work  before  gaining 
sufficient  speed  to  follow  a  moderate  speaker  with  accuracy,  he  should 
consider  carefully  in  what  his  deficiencies  consist.  If  he  has  neglected 
the  manual  drills  prescribed  in  the  Elements  and  hi  the  Manual,  he 
should  go  back  to  the  beginning  and  commence  right.  Until  a  pupil  has 
learned  to  write  the  alphabet,  the  vocal  and  the  consonantal  signs,  in  ten 
seconds,  and  has  learned  to  write  two  letters  joined  with  nearly  the  same 
facility  as  one,  he  has  no  foundation  on  which  to  build  a  rapid  style  of  writ- 
ing. Even  more  than  this,  the  hand  itself  must  be  trained  to  skill  in  the 
use  of  the  pen  by  varied  exercise  ;  and  long  continued  practice. 

If  this  preliminary  work  has  been  well  done,  the  student  should  review 
the  work,  and  see  that  every  special  feature  of  contraction  is  thoroughly 
mastered.  No  student,  we  presume,  will  neglect  the  tables  of  word  and 
phrase-signs,  which  should  be  made  as  familiar  as  the  alphabet.  But,  in 
addition  to  this,  the  writing  exercises  throughout  the  work,  after  the  pro- 
per outlines  are  once  secured,  should  be  written  from  dictation  repeatedly, 
until  they  can  be  written  with  great  freedom,  as  well  as  accuracy. 

The  student  who  is  desirous  of  reaching  the  highest  measure  of  success 
will  avail  himself  of  every  opportunity  tc  nractice  what  he  has  thus  ac- 
quired. He  should  not  leave  this  text  bo  k  until  he  has  approximated  a 
speed  of  150  words  a  minute,  and  until  he  is  able  to  write  certain  portions 
of  it  at  a  i)  ore  rapid  rate  than  this. 

Having  accomplished  so  much,  he  should  settle  down  upon  some  special 
line  of  study  and  practice.  If  he  attempts  to  apply  the  the  art  to  all 
branches  of  literature  and  science  that  may  chance  to  come  in  his  way, 
without  any  method,  he  will  waste  much  valuable  time,  and  gain  but  little 
advantage.  We  do  not  object  to  the  practice  of  reporting  sermons,  lectures, 
and  speeches,  on  almost  any  subject  that  may  chance  to  come  in  his  way. 
This  will  do  no  harm  and  may  do  much  good.  But  this  should  not  be  re- 
garded as  serious  study.  In  addition  to  this,  he  must  statedly  and  persist- 
e  tly  follow  some  special  line  of  study  that  will  fit  him  for  the  practical 
work  in  which  he  expects  to  engage.  This  work  may  be  determined  for 
him  by  circumstances,  as  in  the  case  of  students  in  our  professional  schools, 


OF  TAKIGRAFY.  145 

or  of  those  who  are  already  acquainted  with  some  professional  practice,  or 
have  some  special  scientific  acquirements.  But  if  the  students  are  young 
men  or  young  ladies  with  no  classical  or  professional  training,  they  can 
select  some  special  field  for  culture  until  actual  employment  settles  this 
question  for  them. 

When  actually  °ettled  in  any  kind  of  work,  study  the  best  outlines  for  the 
words  and  phrases  of  frequent  occurrence.  As  these  words  and  phrases 
differ  indefinitely  in  different  kinds  of  employment,  they  cannot  be  fully 
treated  in  the  text-books ;  but  any  competent  itstructor  can  furnish  con- 
tracted outlines  for  them.  If  such  assistance  is  not  at  hand  the  student 
should  learn  to  rely  on  his  own  invention  to  devise  contractions  for  special 
cases  as  they  arise.  These  contractions  should  be  formed  in  harmony  with 
the  principles  of  the  system,  and  form  a  natural  part  of  it.  Such  contrac- 
tions are  expected  and  provided  for  :  and  the  student  that  uses  them  need 
not  feel  that  he  goes  beyond  the  system.  He  is  only  using  in  new  and 
special  ways,  the  principles  previously  acquired.  However,  the  student 
should  observe  that  an  excess  of  invention  will  rather  hinder  than  help  him 
in  getting  speed.  The  contracted  outlines  need  not  be  very  numerous. 
They  should  never  be  allowed  to  become  burdensome 


146 


THE  HAND-BOOK 


J=> 


^      ^  -  1—  ^        I 


\  >, 


-o 


1%. 


c 

!     (</,(/, 


\ 


"V  , 


OF  TAKIGRAFY. 


147 


1    :     -C-x   c/t  . 


XJ 


I  J 


7 


t—  , 


O 


—  I 


\.^     ,    CZ-A^_X.    ^  t| 


o—  O  .* 


"j,  3^.  ^    "53 


I— 


S\.        QX  r* 


7 


THE  HAND-BOOK 


-s  v 


"L 


"3 


V- 


v 


Oc_ 


t 

NO 


OF  TAKIGRAFY.  149 


WRITING  EXERCISE  22. 

WRITING. — Whatever  be  the  fate  of  this  or  that  system, 
though  every  author  perish  without  a  name,  yet  the  art  of 
writing  is  not  only  commanding  in  its  origin  and  history,  but 
is  beautiful  in  its  graceful  perfections,  and  imposing  in  its 
proper  imagery.  The  true  imagery  of  writing  is  culled,  then, 
from  the  sublime  and  beatiful  in  nature  ;  and  here  the  mind 
cannot  but  contemplate  its  advent  among  the  Hebrews  with 
mingled  emotions  of  veneration,  awe,  devotion,  admiration, 
and  pleasure.  The  summit  of  Sinai  is  clad  with  vivid  light- 
nings, and  rocked  by  the  awful  thunders  of  the  Eternal,  while 
amid  the  conflicting  elements  and  blazonry  of  heaven's  artil- 
lery the  pen  of  the  Law-giver  is  put  forth  to  give  his  divine 
law,  and  the  first  tracings  of  this  proud  art  to  man.  There 
he  grouped  in  lessened  lines  the  sun  in  his  glory,  and  the 
moon  in  her  unshorn  majesty,  the  varied  shore,  the  straits, 
the  indentations,  the  sparkling  islands,  and  culminating  waves 
of  the  ocean.  He  blent  the  windings  of  the  Euphrates  and 
Jordan  with  the  oaks  of  Bashan  and  the  cedars  of  Lebanon ; 
with  the  rainbow  of  the  cloud  he  capped  the  tall  pines  of 
Idumea,  and  mingled  the  rich  shrubbery  of  Paradise  with  the 
spiral  furs  of  Sidonia.  Every  dot  was  a  star,  and  every  cross 
[dash]  a  line  of  light  from  the  eternal  hills ;  and  when  the 
whole  was  finished,  this  wondrous  art  flamed  out  from  the 
bosom  of  the  rock,  bearing  the  solemn  and  divine  injunction 
of  the  moral  law,  as  rules  of  action  fcr  all  mankind. — KEY  TO 
SPENCER'S  PENMANSHIP. 

WRITING  WELL.— When  a  man  would  speak  well,  he  must 
conceive  clearly  the  ideas  which  he  desires  to  express  ;  and  if  he 
would  write  well,  he  must  have  distinctly  impressed  on  his  mind 
the  characters  which  he  means  to  exhibit.  To  illustrate  the 
second  essential  of  good  writing,  viz.,  power  of  execution,  by 
the  same  analogy,  however  just  and  clear  a  man's  conceptions 
may  be,  if  his  utterance  be  labored,  slow,  and  timid,  his  dis- 
course will  be  imperfect  and  unsatisfactory.  In  like  manner 
if  the  letters  be  well  formed,  but  combined  and  arranged  with- 
out ease,or  gracefulness,  the  writing  will  never  be  thought 
beautiful  or  pleasing.  By  long  experience  and  observation  in 


150  THE  HAND-BOOK 

teaching,  we  are  induced  to  believe  that  but  a  small  proportion 
of  minds  are  deficient  in  the  faculty  of  apprehending  propor- 
tionate forms  and  happy  blending  of  imagery,  reflected  through 
the  medium  of  the  eye.  Such  apprehension  is  generally  devel- 
oped with  the  greatest  quickness,  particularly  when  the  judg- 
ment is  assisted  in  its  decisions  by  the  active  power  and  happy 
opportunity  of  comparison  presented.  Imagery,  commended 
to  our  favorable  notice  and  selection  when  young,  by  those  we 
love,  and  on  whose  judgment  we  depend,  or  left  unforbidden  to 
voluntary  selection  amid  our  school-boy  scenes,  when  the  young 
heart  first  begins  to  revel  amid  Nature's  varied  charms,  and 
drink  the  smiles  from  friendship's  sun-lit  brow,  makes  a  deep 
and  lasting  impression,  which  time  and  toil  and  age  can  scarce- 
ly mar,  and  never  obliterate.  Such  is  our  nature.  It  is  the 
poetry  as  well  as  the  reality  of  our  existence,  embalming  the 
scenery  we  loved  in  the  innocent  days  of  untried  being. 

Better  is  it  for  the  novitiate  in  the  art  of  writing  to  sit  down 
alone  with  his  materials  and  copy  the  moon  in  all  her  phases, 
borrow  from  the  serpentinings  of  the  brook  that  meanders  at 
his  feet,  bring  the  Lombardy  poplar  to  his  aid,  follow  the  curve 
of  the  pendent  willow  from  tendril  to  stamen,  and  bind  the 
whole  with  the  undulating  folds  of  the  woodbine,  and  then 
call  it  chirography,  than  depend  for  a  model  of  his  hand  on 
those  miserable  productions  that,  without  form  or  comeliness, 
pain  and  perplex,  and  against  the  worship  of  which  there  is  no 
command,  either  specified  or  implied.  He  would  thus  have 
more  of  nature,  and  therefore  more  of  the  true  art  of  writing. 

Thus  the  proper  images  of  writing  being  implanted  in  the 
mind,  by  having  them  early  before  the  eye,  are  adopted  by  the 
judgment  after  comparison  has  done  its  labor,  and  doubt  has 

coased. 

The  pow^r  to  bring  forth  such  imagery  on  paper  is 
the  arm,  forearm,  hand,  and  fingers,  and  can  only  be  devel- 
oped by  exercises  that  affect  these  auxiliary  localities,   and 
bring  a  four-fold  power  to  act  conjointly  with  ease  and 

Without  a  free  and  unobstructed  constant  horizontal  move- 
ment from  right  to  left,  through  the  whole  line,  the  writing 
will  be  wanting  in  harmony  of  slope,  ease,  and  truthfulnesi 
of  combination.  But  when  all  these  movements  are  practiced 


OF  TAKIGRAFY.  151 


fully  and  systematically,  all  the  muscles  from  the  shoulder 
downwards  develop  themselves  rapidly,  and  power  is  gained 
over  the  pen  to  bring  forth  the  adopted  imagery  of  the  mind 
in  all  the  grace  and  elegance  that  spring  from  just  proportions 
and  easy  execution. 

Practice,  to  be  sure,  is  indispensable  in  bringing  to  perfection 
any  art,  science,  or  profession. 

The  pupil  must  not  expect  to  be  able  at  once  to  execute  what 
he  fully  comprehends.  Patience  and  energy  are  required  to 
attain  a  thorough  and  perfect  command  of  hand.  There  is 
no  royal  road  by  which  idleness  and  indifference  may  find 
their  way  to  a  goal  which  is  only  to  be  reached  by  diligent  and 
well-directed  application.  The  only  process  really  short  is 
such  as  is  made  so  by  commencing  in  a  right  manner  from  the 
outset,  securing  the  advantage  of  the  instructions  of  an  ex- 
perienced teacher  till  the  object  is  accomplished.  And  when 
the  object  is  accomplished,  how  beautiful  and  imposing  are 
the  specimens  of  art  which  the  proficient  is  able  to  produce  ! 
The  eye  glances  along  the  well- written  page  with  as  much 
pleasure  as  it  rests  on  a  beautiful  grove  when  nature  and  art 
have  unitedly  tasked  themselves  to  blend  the  greatest  variety 
with  the  utmost  symmetry. — SPENCER'S  PENMANSHIP. 


WRITING  EXERCISE  23. 

THE  ARMOR  OF  ERIC. 
There  was  deep  and  wondrous  meaning 

In  that  northern  legend,  old. 
That  when  Eric  forged  his  armor 

From  his  lips  an  anthem  rolled, 

Rolled  above  the  sounding  anvil 
Diapasons  high  and  brave, 

Telling  of  the  victors  laurel, 

Telling  of  the  heroes  grave. 

There  he  stood,  the  swart  and  earnest, 
Turning  in  his  brawny  hands, 

Many  an  helmet  on  his  anvil. 

For  the  knights  of  many  lands. 

And  the  high  heroic  music, 

Mingling  with  the  hammer's  peal, 
Gave  to  Eric's  armor  virtue 

Never  known  before  to  steel. 


152  THE  HAND-BOOK 

Over  all  shone  Eric's  helmets 

In  the  van  like  warrior  stars, 

Dazzling  flashed  the  sacred  armor 
On  the  battles  sounding  cars. 

Helm  and  Hauberk  were  enchanted 
In  that  old  and  wondrous  time, 

For  he  made  his  simple  smithy 

Glorious  with  the  martial  rhyme. 

There's  a  nobler,  grander  armor, 

Than  the  north-men  ever  made, 

That  the  human  soul  must  fashion 
When  her  battle  is  arrayed, 

When  the  lists  of  life  are  open, 

When  the  demon  shadow  falls, 

When  the  trump  of  truth  is  sounding 
Many  a  charge  on  errors  walls. 

Let  us.  when  we  forge  that  armor 

Think  and  whisper  holy  thought, 

Hymns  to  which  the  Pauls  and  Stephens 
Many  a  mighty  armor  wrought, 

Helm  and  Hauberk  then  enchanted 
By  the  high  and  holy  rhyme, 

Shall  forever  bear  us  scathless 

On  the  battle  field  of  time. 


BREVITIES. 

We  make  laws,  but  we  follow  customs. 

A  good  man  will  never  teach  what  he  does  not  believe. 

They  never  find  God  who  seek  Him  solely  by  reasoning. 

A  clear  conscience  is  the  best  law,  and  temperance  the  best 
physic. 

The  human  heart  is  like  heaven, — the  more  angels  the  more 
room  for  them. 

Though  we  travel  the  world  over  to  find  the  beautiful,  we 
must  carry  it  with  us,  or  we  find  it  not. 

Let  us  at  least  commence  the  day  with  words  of  kindness, 
for  even  the  birds  sing  praise  to  their  Creator  every  morning. 

ANECDOTE. — "  How  do  you  know,"  said  a  traveler  to  a  poor, 
wandering  Arab  of  the  desert,  "that  there  is  a  God?"  "In 
the  same  manner,"  he  replied,  "that  I  trace  the  footsteps  of 
of  an  animal, — by  the  prints  it  leaves  upon  the  sand." 


OF  TAKIGRAFY.  153 


WRITING    EXERCISE    24. 

FREEDOM  AND  PATRIOTISM.  God  has  stamped  upon  our  very 
humanity  the  impress  of  freedom.  It  is  the  unchartered  pre- 
rogative of  human  nature.  A  soul  ceases  to  be  a  soul,  in 
proportion  as  it  ceases  to  be  free.  Strip  it  of  this,  and  you 
strip  it  of  one  of  its  essential  and  characteristic  attributes. 
Every  people  is  attached  to  its  country  just  in  proportion  as 
it  is  free.  No  matter  if  that  country  be  in  the  rocky  fastnesses 
of  Switzerland,  amidst  the  snows  of  Tartary,  or  on  the 
most  barren  and  lonely  island-shore  ;  yet,  when  the  songs  of 
those  free  homes  chance  to  fall  upon  the  exile's  ear,  no  soft 
and  ravishing  airs  that  wait  upon  the  timid  f  eastings  of  Asiatic 
opulence  ever  thrilled  the  heart  with  such  mingled  rapture 
and  agony  as  those  simple  tones.  Sad  mementos  might  they 
be  of  poverty  and  want  and  toil ;  yet  it  was  enough  that  they 
•were  mementos  of  happy  freedom. 

I  have  seen  my  countrymen,  when  a  fellow  wanderer  in 
other  lands  ;  and  little  did  I  see  or  feel  to  warrant  the  appre- 
hension, sometimes  expressed,  that  foreign  travel  would 
weaken  our  patriotic  attachments.  One  sigh  for  home — home, 
arose  from  all  hearts.  And  why,  from  palaces  and  courts — 
why,  from  galleries  of  the  arts,  where  the  marble  softens  into 
life,  and  painting  sheds  an  almost  living  presence  of  beauty 
around  it — why,  from  the  mountain's  awful  brow,  and  the 
lonely  valleys  and  lakes,  touched  with  the  sunset  hues  of  old 
romance — why,  from  those  venerable  and  touching  ruins  to 
which  our  very  heart  grows — why,  from  all  these  scenes,  were 
they  looking  beyond  the  swellings  of  the  Atlantic  wave,  to  a 
dearer  and  holier  spot  of  earth — their  own,  own  country? 
Doubtless,  it  was  in  part  because  it  is  their  country !  But  it 
was  also,  because  they  knew  that  there  was  no  oppression,  no 
pitiful  exaction  of  petty  tyranny,  no  accredited  and  irresist- 
ible religious  domination,  no  odious  soldier  at  every  corner, 
or  swarms  of  imploring  beggars,  the  victims  of  misrule  ;  be- 
cause there  was  liberty — upon  all  the  green  hills,  and  amidst 
all  the  peaceful  villages — liberty,  the  wall  of  fire  around  the 
humblest  home  ;  the  crown  of  glory,  studded  with  her  ever- 
blazing  stars,  upon  the  proudest  mansion  I  OavmuE  DEWEY. 


154 


THE  HAND-BOOK 


NX"i       Q) 

^L 


3     ^       £_    ^ 

\~^s 


—     ^      2^.6 

^    ,      ^^1         ^ 


^,-0, 

/I*  ^—^ 


^ 


°/ 


s« 


^^ 
^ 


\-~  ^ 


.  > 


-5 


r- 


'.  Sr  ^ JJ 


kx' 

^y 


\. 


k^ 


S    -A 


^^    ?       % 


01 


-LA 


V^    ^ 


OF  TAKIGRAFY. 


155 


\_p    !     3 


.   4- 


-V     <^     x 


), 


.   5 


\x^V 


9    J 


-V 


156  THE  HAND-BOOK 

SPECIMENS  OF  BUSINESS  LETTERS. 

(KEY  TO  OPPOSITE  PAGE.) 

NEW  YORK,  Oct.  31, 1882. 
MB.  JAMES  BLANCHABD,  CHICAGO.  * 

Dear  Sir :— We  take  pleasure  in  sending  this  day, 

by  your  order,  the  enclosed  invoice  of  goods,  amounting  to  Orte  Thousand 
Dollars ;  subject  to  10  per  cent,  discount. 

Your  references  being  entirely  satisfactory,  we  have  no  hesitation  hi 
opening  an  account,  and  allowing  you  our  best  terms.  Trusting  that  the 
goods,  which  are  sent  by  express,  will  arrive  safely,  and  meet  your  favor, 
We  are  Yours  Truly, 

ALEXANDER  SMITH  &  CO. 


BUFFALO,  Nov.  10,  1882. 
MESSBS.  A.  B.  HARRIS  &  Co.,  NEW  YORK. 

Dear  Sir :— Enclosed  find  P.  O.  Order  for  $23.00,  for  which  please  send 
by  the  American  Express,  the  following  goods  : 

4  Lancaster  Table  Spreads, at    $1.50  $    6.00 

10  Yds.  Waterproof  Cloth,  5  black,  and  5  blue, 1.00  10.00 

20  Yds.  Calico,  brown,  with  small  figure, 10  2.00 

30     "          "      white,  with  small  pink  dot, 15  4.50 

2  Linen  Handkerchiefs. ..                            25  .50 


Total          $23.00 
Yours, 

J.  HAMMERSMITH. 


MESSES.  J.  L.  MERRITT  &  Co., 

We  beg  to  acknowledge  receipt 

of  your  esteemed  favor  of  the  15th  inst.,  by  which  we  note  that  First  of 
Exchange  for  £900  remittance  per  "  Western  Empire,"  reached  you  in  due 
course. 

Second  of  Exchange  was  forwarded  to  you  on  the  10th  inst.,  per  "  City  of 
Berlin.'" 

We  have  had  no  tidings  of  the  "  City  of  Berlin  "  since  her  departure  from 
this  port ;  but  as  the  weather  has  been  favorable,  we  hope  soon  to  hear  of 
her  safe  arrival  on  your  side. 

As  soon  as  the  claims  for  short  delivery  have  been  finally  adjusted,  we 
will  forward  you  closed  accounts,  together  with  remittance  for  the  balance. 
London,  September  25,  1882. 

BARING  BROS. 


OF   TAKIGRAFY. 


15V 


^ 


) 


s 


10 


1    !    o^Xf 


^^1 

,25     p    fc  2 .  . 


158  THE  HAND-BOOK 

KEY  TO  THE  OPPOSITE  PAGE. 

TMTIMOHT  REPORTED  BY  SAMUEL  PUBNELL,  OF  SAN  FRANCISCO,  CAL. 

(Contributed  in  Takigrafy  to  Browne's  Phonographic  Monthly.) 
Mr.  C.  Stone,  examined  by  Commissioner  Coyle. 

Question.— Can  you,  sir,  state  any  principle  establishing  commutation 
rates,  monthly  ticket,  or  other  tickets  entitling  parties  to  ride  without 
payment  hi  advance  for  each  ride,  except  what  you  have  already  given  as 
to  the  established  rules  about  rates  of  fare  ? 

Mr.  STONE.— We  have  no  universal  rule  governing  commutation  rates, 
round  trip  tickets,  &c.,  but  they  are  made  usually  where  people  dwelling  in 
the  country  can  go  into  large  cities  and  out  the  same  day,  where  hotel  bills 
do  not  have  to  be  incurred.  Low  rates  are  based  a  good  deal  on  that  idea, 
also  on  the  number  of  persons  or  commuters  to  be  accommodated. 

Question. — Then  no  rule  can  be  given  concerning  them,  you  think.  They 
are  fixed  with  reference  to  the  general  character  of  the  business,  and  its 
magnitude,  with  some  consideration  for  the  speedy  and  healthy  develop- 
ment of  the  country,  also  keeping  a  sharp  look-out  for  the  treasury  of 
the  road  ? 

Answer.— Yes,  that  is  it  exactly.  I  know  of  no  rule  by  which  such  things 
can  be  calculated.  It  is  a  matter  of  good  judgment  for  each  individual 
case  as  it  arises. 

Question.— Is  there  economy  in  taking  a  through-ticket,  to  your  ultimate 
destination  ?  If  so,  how  much,  what  percentage  is  that  economy,  may  I 
inquire  ? 

Answer. — The  saving  is  perhaps  equal  to  some  25  per  cent,  or  more,  all 
round.  But  one  road  does  not  stand  all  the  reduction  ;  it  is  shared  by  all 
the  roads  proportionally,  generally  according  to  then-  mileage,  but  some- 
times other  elements  creep  hi  which  vary  that  somewhat.  As  I  have  said 
before,  I  do  not  know  how  to  tell  you  these  things  hi  rules,  because  it  is  a 
matter  of  judgment,  of  friendly  compromise  and  the  like. 

Question.— When  charges  of  rates  are  varied  how  do  they  change,  are 
they  mostly  in  favor  of  a  reduction  ? 

Answer.— Almost  always.  I  cannot  at  this  moment  remember  that  we  ever 
voluntarily  raised  rates.  Such  an  act  would  generally  not  be  a  position 
based  on  good  policy.  It  might  also  be  ineffective  as  a  finality,  and  the 
public  would  be  pretty  sure  to  look  upon  it  as  declaratory  of  an  overmas- 
tering desire  to  get  rich  too  suddenly,  and  hostile  legislation  would  be 
invited. 


OF  TAKIGRAFY. 


159 


V 


IP 


1 


T  ~^^   *-  > 


160  THE  HAND-BOOK 

SPECIMEN  OF  LAW  REPORTING. 

ADDRESS  OF  HON.  CHAS.  S.  MAY;  furnished  by  E.  P.  Goodrich. 
If  your  Honor  please, — Gentlemen  of  the  Jury  :— 
In  my  whole  experience  as  an  advocate  and  public  speaker  I  have  seldom 
if  eyer,  felt  impressed  with  such  embarrassment  as  I  now  feel  in  rising  to 
close  the  argument  for  the  people  in  this  most  important  cause.  Called 
here  without  previous  knowledge  of  the  facts  farther  than  as  a  citizen  I  had 
read  in  the  public  prints,  I  do  not  enjoy  the  advantage  of  that  intimate 
acquaintance  with  all  the  ramifications  of  this  evidence,  that  knowledge 
of  witnesses,  their  history,  then*  character,  which  my  brothers  on  either  side 
have  enjoyed  throughout  this  trial.  Coming  here  in  the  line  of  my  pro- 
fessional duty,  I  find  a  most  extraordinary  case.  I  find  that  a  great  crime 
has  been  committed  by  somebody :  a  crime  that  imperils  your  habitations, 
your  public  structures,  the  very  lives  of  your  citizens.  I  say  I  find  that  a 
great  crime  has  been  committed,  because  it  is  not  claimed  here  by  my 
brothers  on  the  other  side  that  the  burning  of  Armory  Hall  was  acciden- 
tal. The  fire  was  set  by  somebody.  Who  set  it  ?  That  is  the  question  which 
you  are  to  decide.  Gentlemen  of  the  jury,  I  am  here  to  assist  you  in  the 
discharge  of  this  duty,  and  I  beg  you  to  believe  that  what  I  shall  say  to  you 
to-night  is  prompted  by  no  spirit  of  m  ilice  or  persecution  against  anybody. 
I  am  here  to  assist  the  prosecution,  which  I  believe  has  been  conducted  as 
carefully,  as  candidly,  as  any  prosecution  that  was  ever  commenced  in  the 
State  of  Michigan.  I  have  seen  prosecutions,  as  you  may  have  seen,  as  all 
lawyers  and  men  of  experience  have  seen,  prosecutions  marked  by  bitterness 
prosecutions  that  have  degenerated  into  mere  persecutions  ;  but  such  is  not 
the  case  here,  and  I  am  glad  to  be  able  to  say  this  much  upon  my  respon- 
sibility as  a  man  and  a  lawyer  in  your  presence  to  relieve,  if  it  should  be 
thought  necessary,  this  prosecuting  officer  from  all  imputations  that  have 
been  cast  upon  him.  Under  such  facts  as  have  been  divulged  before  you, 
what  was  the  duty  of  the  prosecuting  officer  of  this  county  ?  Can  any  man 
say  that  he  would  have  been  justified  under  his  oath  of  office,  on  his  public 
duty  and  conscience  in  passing  this  case  by,  in  entering  a  nolle  prosequi  in 
the  court  upon  it  ?  As  he  told  you  to-day,  and  I  cannot  doubt  his  word 
when  I  see  this  mass  of  work  he  has  accomplished ;  he  has  spent  nearly  a 
year  of  work  hi  bringing  this  case  to  your  attention,  and  yet,  gentlemen, 
in  the  discharge  of  this  duty,  hi  the  performance  of  this  Herculean  labor, 
he  could  have  been  actuated  by  no  motive  except  the  motive  of  the  pub- 
lic good  and  the  public  safety. 


OF  TAKIGRAFY. 


161 


^1    v 


1  ^ 

' 


/e> 


°] 


162 


THE  HAND-BOOK 


V^  L/M! 


N  ^-^P  O      O-/ 

2  .6^  h  vlXxfc/ 

Vv_^  i  < 


*>^ 


Q        — ,     IS   *~£ , 

^— ^ 


y* 


-b— 


^^ 


^V 


^ 


-  v> 

<XU^ 

<LP 


2_. 


q 


1_    ^   x-vv^    ^     ^~  . 

,  ,^^^^^  wTT. 


OF  TAKIGRAFY. 


163 


.<^^  JU^s  v  r 
-y  i  ^^^-i^. 


-9  ox^  ^    ""-V, 

V-^  *-*  ~^       c^^^V^^^ ^O'^ 

^^-^^c^  a  ^^_— i  ^7  ^-.  ^^^^  °-^-^  ^g> 
<. 

\  ^-/^JI 

^  ,-^V  1     c      r.          /< \^   T_^    ^^ \^      ^A^  — 

-Q   .    fe  c_^  — ^  L— CL/  . — i/Q— « 
N»  S**^  r^-S«~y.  \^9 


— ^~"V 


9     I 


\    - 


"~A, 


XX 


THE  HAND-BOOK 


DECLARATION  OF   INDEPENDENCE. 

When,  in  the  course  of  human  events,  it  becomes  necessary  for  one  people 
to  dissolve  the  political  bands  which  have  connected  them  with  another, 
and  to  assume,  among  the  powers  of  the  earth,  the  separate  and  equal  sta- 
tion to  which  the  laws  of  Nature,  and  Nature's  God  entitle  them,  a  decent 
respect  to  the  opinions  of  mankind  requires  that  they  should  declare  the 
causes  which  impel  them  to  the  separation. 

We  hold  these  truths  to  be  self-evident  :  that  all  men  are  created  equal  ; 
that  they  are  en  lowed  by  their  Creator  with  certain  inalienable  rights  ; 
that  among  these  are  life,  liberty,  and  the  pursuit  of  happiness.  That  to 
secure  these  rights,  governments  are  instituted  among  men,  deriving  their 
just  powers  from  the  consent  of  the  governed  :  that  whenever  any  form  of 
government  becomes  destructive  of  these  ends,  it  is  the  right  of  the  people 
to  alter  or  to  abolish  it,  and  to  institute  a  new  government,  laying  its  foun- 
dation on  such  principles,  and  organizing  its  powers  in  such  form  as  to 
them  shall  seem  most  likely  to  effect  their  safety  and  happiness.  Prudence, 
indeed,  will  dictate  that  governments  long  established  should  not  be  changed 
for  light  and  transient  causes  ;  and  accordingly  all  experience  hath  shown 
that  mankind  are  more  disposed  to  suffer,  while  evils  are  sufferable,  than 
to  right  themselves,  by  abolishing  the  forms  to  which  they  are  accustomed. 
But  when  a  lon^  train  of  abuses  and  usurpations,  pursuing  invariably  the 
same  object,  evinces  a  design  to  reduce  them  under  absolute  despotism,  it 
is  their  right,  it  is  their  duty,  to  throw  off  such  government,  and  to  provide 
new  guards  for  their  future  security.  Such  has  been  the  patient  sufferance 
of  these  colonies,  and  such  is  now  the  necessity  which  constrains  them  to 
alter  their  former  systems  of  government.  The  history  of  the  present  king 
of  Great  Britain  is  a  history  of  repeated  injuries  and  usurpations,  all  having 
in  direct  object  the  establishment  of  an  absolute  tyranny  over  these  States. 
To  prove  this,  let  facts  be  submitted  to  a  candid  world  : 

He  has  refused  his  assent  to  laws  the  most  wholesome  and  necessary  for 
the  public  good. 

He  has  forbidden  his  governors  to  pass  laws  of  immediate  and  pressing 
importance,  unless  suspended  in  their  operation  till  his  assent  should  be 
obtained  ;  and  when  so  suspended,  he  has  utterly  neglected  to  attend  to 
them.  He  has  refused  to  pass  other  laws  for  the  accommodation  of  large 
districts  of  people,  unless  those  people  would  relinquish  the  right  of  repre- 
sentation in  the  legislature—  a  right  inestimable  to  them,  and  formidable  to 
tyrants  only. 

He  has  called  together  legislative  bodies  at  places  unusual,  uncomfort- 
able, and  distant  from  the  repository  of  the  public  records,  for  the  sole 
purpose  of  fatiguing  them  into  compliance  with  his  measures. 

He  has  dissolved  repr  sentative  houses  repeatedly  for  opposing,  with 
manly  firmness,  his  invasions  on  the  rights  of  the  people. 

He  has  refused,  for  a  long  time  after  such  dissolution,  to  cause  others  to 
be  elected  ;  whereby  the  legislative  powers,  incapable  of  annihil  'tion,  have 
returned  to  the  people  at  large  for  their  exercise,  the  state  remaining,  in 
the  mean  time,  exposed  to  all  the  dangers  of  invasion  from  without  and 
convulsions  within. 

He  has  endeavored  to  prevent  the  population  of  these  States  :  for  that 
purpose  obstructing  the  laws  of  naturalization  of  foreigners  ;  refusing  to 
pass  others  to  encourage  then-  migration  hither,  and  raising  the  conditions 
of  new  appropriations  of  lands. 

He  has  obstructed  the  administration  of  justice  by  refusing  his  assent  to 
laws  for  establishing  judiciary  powers. 

He  has  made  judges  dependent  on  his  will  alone  for  the  tenure  of  their 
offices,  and  the  amount  and  payment  of  their  salaries. 

He  has  erected  a  multitude  of  new  offices,  and  sent  hither  swarms  of 
officers  to  harass  our  people,  and  eat  out  their  substance. 

He  has  kept  among  us,  in  times  of  peace,  standing  armies,  without  the 
consent  of  our  legislatures. 

He  has  effected  to  render  the  military  independent  of,  and  superior  to,  the 
civil  power. 


OF    TAKIGRAFY. 


i  G5 


DECLARATION  OF  INDEPENDENCE. 


166  THE  HAND-BOOK 


He  has  combined  with  others  to  subject  us  to  a  jurisdiction  foi-eign  to  our 
Constitution,  and  unacknowledged  by  our  laws ;  giving  his  assent  to  their 
acts  of  pretended  legislation  : 

For  quartering  large  bodies  of  armed  troops  among  us  : 
For  protecting  them  by  a  mock  trial  from  punishment  for  any  murders 
which  they  should  commit  on  the  inhabitants  of  these  states : 

For  cutting  off  our  trade  with  all  parts  of  the  world : 

For  imposing  taxes  on  us  without  our  consent : 

For  depriving  us,  in  many  cases,  of  the  benefits  of  trial  by  jury : 

For  transporting  us  beyond  seas  to  be  tried  for  pretended  offences : 

For  abolishing  the  free  system  of  English  laws  in  a  neighboring  province, 
establishing  therein  an  arbitrary  government,  and  enlarging  its  boundaries, 
so  as  to  render  it  at  once  an  example  and  fit  instrument  for  introducing  the 
same  absolute  rule  into  these  colonies  : 

For  taking  away  our  charters,  abolishing  our  most  valuable  laws,  and 
altering,  fundamentally,  the  forms  of  our  government : 

For  suspending  pur  own  legislatures,  and  declaring  themselves  invested 
with  power  to  legislate  for  us  in  all  cases  whatsoever. 

He  has  abdicated  government  here  by  declaring  us  out  of  his  protection, 
and  waging  war  against  us. 

He  has  plundereh  our  seas,  ravaged  our  coasts,  burnt  our  towns,  and 
destroyed  the  lives  of  our  people. 

He  is  at  this  time  transporting  large  armies  of  foreign  mercenaries  to 
complete  the  works  of  death,  desolation,  and  tyranny  already  begun,  with 
circumstances  of  cruelty  and  perfidy  scarcely  paralleled  in  the  most  bar- 
barous ages,  and  totally  unworthy  the  head  of  a  civilized  nation. 

He  has  constrained  our  fellow-citizens,  taken  captive  on  the  high  seas, 
to  bear  arms  against  their  country,  to  become  the  executioners  of  their 
friends  and  brethren,  or  to  fall  themselves  by  their  hands. 

He  has  excited  domestic  insurrections  among  us,  and  has  endeavored  to 
bring  on  the  inhabitants  of  our  frontiers  the  merciless  Indian  savages, 
whose  known  rule  of  warfare  is  an  undistinguished  destruction  of  all  ages, 
sexes,  and  conditions. 

In  every  stage  of  these  oppressions  we  have  petitioned  for  redress  in  the 
most  humble  terms ;  our  repeated  petitions  have  been  answered  only  by 
repeated  injury.  A  prince  whose  character  is  thus  marked  by  every  act 
which  may  define  a  tyrant  is  unfit  to  be  the  ruler  of  a  free  people. 

Nor  have  \ve  been  wanting  in  attention  to  our  British  brethren.  We  have 
warned  them,  from  time  to  time,  of  attempts  by  their  legislature  to  extend 
an  unwarrantable  jurisdiction  over  us.  We  have,  reminded  them  of  the 
circumstances  of  our  emigration  and  settlement  here.  We  have  appealed 
to  their  native  justice  and  magnanimity,  and  we  have  conjured  them  by 
the  ties  of  our  common  kindred  to  disavow  these  usurpations,  which  would 
inevitably  interrupt  our  connections  and  correspondence.  They,  too.  have 
been  deaf  to  the  voice  of  justice  and  consanguinity.  We  must,  therefore, 
acquiesce  hi  the  necessity  which  denounces  our  separation,  and  hold  them, 
as  we  hold  the  rest  of  mankind,  enemies  in  war,  in  peace  friends. 

We,  therefore,  the  representatives  of  the  United  States  of  America,  in 
General  Congress  assembled,  appealing  to  the  Supreme  Judge  of  the  world 
for  the  rectitude  of  our  intentions,  do,  in  the  name  and  by  the  authority  of 
the  good  people  of  these  colonies,  solemnly  publish  and  declare,  that  these 
United  Colonies  are,  and  of  right  ought  to  be,  free  and  independent  States ; 
that  they  are  absolved  from  all  allegiance  to  the  British  crown,  and  that  all 
political  connection  between  them  and  the  State  of  Great  Britain  is,  and 
ought  to  be,  totally  dissolved  ;  and  that,  as  free  and  independent  States, 
they  have  full  power  to  levy  war,  conclude  peace,  contract  alliances,  estab- 
lish commerce,  and  to  do  all  other  acts  and  things  which  independent  States 
may  of  right  do  And  for  the  support  of  this  declaration,  with  a  firm 
reliance  on  the  protection  of  Divine  Providence,  we  mutually  pledge  t« 
each  other  our  lives,  our  fortunes,  and  our  sacred  honor. 


OF  TAKIGRAFY. 


167 


DECLARATION  OF  INDEPENDENCE.  (Concluded.) 


168 


THE  HAND-BOOK 


C^'AV 


"v0 


\> 


PUBLICATIONS. 


A.  LF  A  BET  CHARTS. — 18x28  inches.    For  class  teaching.    6c. 

THE  NUTSHELL. — 32  pages.  A  brief,  yet  quite  complete 
treatise  on  the  Simple  Style,  illustrating  principles,  and  containing: 
writing  and  reading  lessons Paper,  1  Oc  ;  Cloth,  25c. 

THE  MANUAL  OF  TAKIGRAFY.— A  complete  treatise  on 
the  Simple  Style,  fully  illustrating  and  explaining  all  principles. 

$1.25. 

THE  ELEMENTS  OF  TACHYGRAPHY— Gives  the  filosofy 
of  the  system,  and  the  principles  ef  the  Simple  Style  amply  illustrated 
by  copper-plate  engravings $1.25. 

THE  HAND-BOOK. — Contains  a  chapter  on  the  elementary 
principles,  followed  by  a  complete  treatise  on  the  Reporting  Style 
of  Takigraf y.  Cloth $2.00. 

THE  AMANUENSIS.— A  new,  rapid  and  superior  method  of 
teaching  Takigraf  y  for  Amanuensis  and  Reporting  purposes.     The 
set  of  forty  lessons  furnish  correct  forms  for  about  10,000  common 
words  and  frases,  arranged  for  dictation   and   drill. 
Per  Set $5.00. 

THE  SHORTHAND  WRITER.— A  monthly  magazine,  eight ' 
pages  common  type,  eight  pages  shorthand.  Indispensable  to  all  who 
wish  to  keep  posted  in  matters  pertaining  to  the  art,  its  writers,  and 
shorthand  matters  generally.   Per  Tear $2.00. 


For  above  Publications,  Instruction,  Circulars,  or  other 
Information,  call  on  or  address 

D.   F.    LINDSL/EY, 

Plainfield,  N.  J. 

D.  KIMBALL, 

83  Madison  St.,  Chicago,  111. 


I 
I 


c 


C?  *  - 


. 

•  ~,r 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 

Los  Angeles 
This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 


University  of  California 

SOUTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 

305  De  Neve  Drive  -  Parking  Lot  17  •  Box  951388 

LOS  ANGELES,  CALIFORNIA  90095-1388 

Return  this  material  to  the  library  from  which  it  was  borrowed. 


A     000  576  274     5 


188U 


